Onkyo Tx Sr876 Owner S Manual SR876_NR906_En

Onkyo-Tx-Sr876-Users-Manual-233156 onkyo-tx-sr876-users-manual-233156

Onkyo-Tx-Nr906-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr906-owner-s-manual

TX-SR876 to the manual c3783e5a-76bb-4e51-989b-82946081c4b3

2014-07-06

: Onkyo Onkyo-Tx-Sr876-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-sr876-owner-s-manual onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 150 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

E
n
AV Receiver
TX-SR876
TX-NR906
Instruction Manual
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
Contents
Introduction ...................................2
Connection ..................................23
First Time Setup ..........................52
Basic Operation...........................70
Using the Listening Modes ........81
Advanced Setup ..........................92
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)........121
Zone 2 and Zone 3.....................130
Controlling Other Components
..137
Others.........................................142
2
Important Safety Instructions
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-
tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro-
vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta-
cles, and the point where they exit from the appara-
tus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12.
Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table spec-
ified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use cau-
tion when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous volt-
age points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and fol-
low local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade-
quate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-
like gap for warm air to escape.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS
OUVRIR
AVIS
PORTABLE CART WARNING
S3125A
3
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
For North American model
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head-
phones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or
the like.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
8. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATT ENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
4
Precautions—Continued
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured mark-
ings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check
for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the
fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
K. MIYAGI
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
5
Contents
Features ............................................................ 6
Supplied Accessories ......................................7
Multiroom Capability ........................................8
Front & Rear Panels .........................................9
Front Panel ...................................................................9
Display .......................................................................11
Rear Panel ..................................................................12
Remote Controller ..........................................15
Installing the Batteries ...............................................15
Aiming the Remote Controller ..................................15
About the Remote Controller Modes .........................16
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ..........................................16
DVD Mode ................................................................18
CD/MD/CDR Modes .................................................19
DOCK Mode ..............................................................20
NET/USB Mode (TX-NR906 only) ..........................21
About Home Theater ......................................22
Enjoying Home Theater .............................................22
Connecting the AV Receiver .........................23
Connecting Your Speakers ........................................23
Bi-amping Front Speakers A .....................................27
Bridging Front Speakers A ........................................28
Bi-amping Front Speakers B ......................................29
Bridging Front Speakers B ........................................30
Connecting Antenna ..................................................31
About AV Connections ..............................................33
Connecting Both Audio & Video ..............................34
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................34
Connecting a TV or Projector ....................................36
Connecting a DVD player ..........................................37
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback
......39
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording
....40
Connecting a Satellite, Cable,
Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source ......41
Connecting Components with HDMI ........................42
Connecting a Game Console ......................................44
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device .................45
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable ........................46
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT
Recorder ..................................................................47
Connecting a Power Amplifier ..................................48
Connecting an RI Dock ..............................................49
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
(North American model only) .................................49
Connecting Onkyo u Components .........................50
Connecting the Power Cord .......................................50
Turning On the AV Receiver ..........................51
Turning On and Standby ............................................51
First Time Setup .............................................52
Monitor Setup ............................................................52
Selecting the Language used for the onscreen setup
menus ......................................................................53
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus ..............................54
Monitor Out Setup .....................................................55
Video Input Setup ......................................................56
Digital Audio Input Setup ..........................................59
Analog Audio Input Setup .........................................60
Speaker Settings .........................................................61
TV Format Setup (not North American models) .......62
AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models) ...........63
Changing the Input Display .......................................63
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT)
....64
Basic Operations ............................................70
Selecting the Input Source ......................................... 70
Setting the Display Brightness .................................. 71
Adjusting Speaker Levels .......................................... 71
Muting the AV Receiver ........................................... 71
Using the Sleep Timer ............................................... 72
Using Headphones ..................................................... 72
Adjusting the Bass & Treble ..................................... 72
Displaying Source Information ................................. 72
Listening to the Radio ....................................73
Listening to AM/FM Stations .................................... 73
Presetting AM/FM Stations ....................................... 75
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only) ................................. 76
Using RDS ................................................................. 77
Recording ........................................................80
Recording the Input Source ....................................... 80
Recording from Different AV Sources ...................... 80
Using the Listening Modes ............................81
Selecting the Listening Modes .................................. 81
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
.... 82
About the Listening Modes ....................................... 88
Advanced Setup ..............................................92
Menu Map ................................................................. 92
Monitor Out Setup ..................................................... 93
Speaker Setup ............................................................ 95
Audio Adjust ........................................................... 105
Adjust Using the Direct Button ............................... 108
Using the Re-EQ Function ...................................... 108
Using the Late Night Function ................................ 109
Source Setup ............................................................ 109
Listening Mode Presets ........................................... 114
Miscellaneous Setup ................................................ 115
Hardware Setup ....................................................... 117
Lock Setup ............................................................... 119
Selecting Audio Inputs ............................................ 120
Specifying the Digital Signal Format ...................... 120
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only) ...........................121
About NET/USB ..................................................... 121
Connecting the AV Receiver ................................... 123
Playing Music Files on a Server .............................. 123
Windows Media Player 11 Setup ............................ 124
Playing Music Files on a USB Device .................... 125
Listening to Internet Radio ...................................... 127
Network Settings ..................................................... 128
Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................130
Connecting Zone 2 .................................................. 130
Connecting Zone 3 .................................................. 131
Powered Zone2 Setting ............................................ 132
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ..................................... 133
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................ 133
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
and Multiroom Control Kits ................................. 136
Controlling Other Components ...................137
Entering Remote Control Codes .............................. 137
Resetting the Remote Controller ............................. 138
Learning Commands ............................................... 140
Using Macros ........................................................... 141
Troubleshooting ...........................................142
Specifications (TX-SR876) ...........................148
Specifications (TX-NR906) ...........................149
6
Features
Amplifier
• 140 Watts/Channel (2ch Driven) @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 200 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 250 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• WRAT-Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz-100 kHz bandwidth)
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry)
• Parallel Push-Pull Amplifier Design with 3-Step
Inverted Darlington Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High
Power Transformer
Processing
• HDMI Audio and Video Processing (Deep Color,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS*1-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolusion Audio, Dolby TrueHD*2,
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD and Multi-CH PCM)
• THX Ultra2 Plus*3 Certified
• HQV-Reon-VX Video Processing with 1080p Video
Upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI
• Component Video Upconversion
• Burr-Brown 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Three-TI (Aureus) 32-Bit DSP Chips
• Neural Surround*4, THX-Neural
• Theater-Dimensional*5 virtual surround sound
•DSD Direct
•Re-EQ
*6 function
Connections
• 4 HDMI*7 Inputs and 2 Outputs
• Onkyo for System Control
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical / 3 Coaxial),
1 Output (Optical)
• 5 S-Video Inputs / 2 Outputs
• Component Video Switching (3 Inputs/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts*8
• Powered Zone 2 and Zone 2 and Zone 3 Pre Out
• IR Input/Output and 12 V Trigger
• RS232 Port for Interface Control
• Bi-Amping and BTL Capability
Miscellaneous
• SIRIUS Ready*9 / XM Ready*10 with XMHD Sur-
round (North American models only)
• HD Radio*11 reception (North American models
only)
• 40 SIRIUS/XM/AM/FM Presets (North American
models)
• 40 AM/FM Presets (European and Asian models)
•
Audyssey
MultEQ®XT*12 to Correct Room Acoustic
Problems
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ™*12 Loudness Correction
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume™*12
• Indepedent Crossover Adjustment
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• Music Optimizer*13 for Compressed Music Files
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
• Newly Designed GUI for System Set-up
• Compatible with RI Dock for iPod
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote with 3 Mac-
ros and Mode-Key LEDs
TX-NR906 Only
• Microsoft Plays For Sure Certified for Windows Vista
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files and
Internet Radio (vTuner Portal)
• USB Port for a Mass USB Strage Device (Audio
Only)
*1
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. ©1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
*2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
*3
THX and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permis-
sion.
*4
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*5
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
*7
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
7
Features—Continued
*8 In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio
amplifier is prohibited.
*9
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
*10
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
*11
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp.
*12
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ®XT,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™, and Audyssey Dynamic EQ™
are trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
*13 Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
*“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
*Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
*“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corpora-
tion, and is intended for home and other limited con-
sumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is pro-
hibited.
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the
same regardless of color.
THX Ultra2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-
uct feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your
guarantee that the Home Theater products you pur-
chase will give you superb performance for many
years to come. THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define
hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and
operation for both digital and analog domains. THX
Ultra2 Plus receivers also feature proprietary THX
technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately
translate movie soundtracks for home theater play-
back.
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
Speaker cable labels
Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Left
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Left
Surround
Right
Surround
Right
Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right
Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Left
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Left
Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Right
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Right
Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Right
SP-B
/
Zone 2
Right
Surround
Right
Surround
Right
Center
Center
Center
Center
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right
Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left
Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left
12
3
Speaker Cable
8
Multiroom Capability
You can use four speaker systems with this AV receiver—Speakers A: a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1
channels) for enjoying DVD movies in your main room, Speakers B: a pair of stereo speakers for serious music listen-
ing in your main room, Zone 2: a stereo speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a third
room. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Speakers A: Enjoy up to 7.1-channel surround-sound playback (see page 23).
You can enjoy the various listening modes, such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 81–91).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 130).
Speakers B: Use a pair for stereo speakers for serious music listening in main room (see page 23).
*Can be used with the subwoofer, center, surround, or surround back speakers as required (see page 98).
Zone 2: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback in a second room (see page 130).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required if Speakers B is used.
Zone 3: Enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in a third room (see page 131).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
*External power amplifier required.
Surround back left and right
speakers
While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 132).
*
Main Room: Speakers A and Speakers B
Front Speakers A
Center speaker*
Surround left and right speakers*
Subwoofer*
Zone 2 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Front Speakers B
Can be used with Speakers A
and Speakers B.
*
9
Front & Rear Panels
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
aON/STANDBY button (51)
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.
bSTANDBY indicator (51)
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
cZONE 2 indicator (134)
This indicator lights up when Zone 2 is selected.
dZONE 3 indicator (134)
This indicator lights up when Zone 3 is selected.
eRemote-control sensor (15)
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
fDisplay
See “Display” on page 11.
gDISPLAY button (72)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
hMASTER VOLUME control (70) and indicator
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to −∞dB,
–81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 115.
iPURE AUDIO button and indicator (81)
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-
tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
this button again selects the previous listening
mode.
jAUDIO SEL button (120)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
kInput selector buttons (70)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO, NET/USB
(TX-NR906 only).
Front Panel
87
5 61 2
blbk9
43
Front flap Push here to open
the flap
TX-NR906 only
10
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
lPHONES jack (72)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
mZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (134)
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.
nLEVEL button (135)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
oTONE button (135)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).
pHDMI OUT button (55)
Used to set the “Monitor Out” setting.
qSTEREO button (81)
Selects the Stereo listening mode.
rTHX button (81)
Selects the THX listening modes.
sDIMMER (RT/PTY/TP) button (71, 78)
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.
Other models, this is the [RT/PTY/TP] button, and
it’s for RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using
RDS” on page 77.
tMEMORY button (75)
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.
uTUNING MODE button (73)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode.
vSETUP button
This button is used to access the onscreen setup
menus that appear on the connected TV.
wTUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER
buttons
When the AM or FM input source is selected, the
TUNING [q]/[w] buttons are used to tune the tuner,
and the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons are used to select
radio presets (see page 75).
When the onscreen setup menus are used, they work
as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The [ENTER] button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
xRETURN button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
yUSB port (TX-NR906 only)
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC) can be plugged in here and the
music selected and played through the AV receiver.
zSETUP MIC (64)
The included speaker setup microphone is con-
nected here for automatic speaker setup.
cr AUX 2 INPUT (45, 80)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
btdl
cp
bm bn bo bp bq br bs bt ck cl cm co cq
cp
dkcs ct
crcn
Other models
North American model
TX-NR906 only
TX-NR906 only
11
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
cs Up [r] and Down [e] buttons (106, 135)
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ct DIGITAL INPUT button (64)
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.
dk LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons (81)
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.
dl POWER switch (51)
American models do not have this switch.
This is the main power switch. When set to OFF,
the AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be
set to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
aSpeaker/channel indicators (88)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
bBTL indicator (61)
Lights up when the “Speaker Type” setting is set to
“BTL” for bridged front speaker operation.
cA and B indicators (70)
Indicate which speaker set is selected: A or B.
dZONE 2 indicator (134)
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
eListening mode and format indicators (81)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
fTuning indicators (73)
HD (North American model only) (76): Lights
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD
Radio technology.
SPS (North American model only) (79):
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s
transmitting secondary multicast channels.
RDS (77): Lights up when tuned to a radio station
that supports RDS (Radio Data System).
AUTO (73): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-
ual Tuning mode is selected.
TUNED (73): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
tion.
FM STEREO (73): Lights up when tuned to a ste-
reo FM station.
gSLEEP indicator (72)
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
hAudyssey indicator (64)
Flashes during automatic speaker setup. Lights up
when the “Equalizer Settings” is set to “Audyssey”.
iHeadphone indicator (72)
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.
jMessage area
Displays various information.
Display
98
67
123
bmblbk
5
4
bn
FL: Front left
C: Center
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
SBR: Surround back right
12
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
kAudio input indicators (76, 120)
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,
the ANALOG indicator lights up.
lVolume level (70)
Displays the volume level.
mMUTING indicator (71)
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
Rear Panel
bt ck
8
549bqbo bp
dn
21 br
bs
367
bl bn
cm cn co cq cr dk dl dmcs ctcpcl
1
*1 TX-NR906 only
North American model
bk bm bo 1
Other models
13
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
au REMOTE CONTROL
This u (Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
nected to the u jack on another u-capable
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
To use u, you must make an analog audio connec-
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
bRS232
cPHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
dCOMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for con-
necting components with a component video out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR
(digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Setup”
on page 58.
eCOMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.
fHDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “Video
Input Setup” on page 56.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
gSIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).
hXM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM
instructions).
iMONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
jAM ANTENNA (not North American model)
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
kZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
lFM ANTENNA (not North American model)
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
mIR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
nETHERNET port (TX-NR906 only)
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
o12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.
pAM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio reception)
(on North American model)
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM
antenna.
qAC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
rDIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connect-
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
Input Setup” on page 59.
sDIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
Input Setup” on page 59.
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
tGND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
uCD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
14
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
vTAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,
etc.
wAUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
xGAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
yCBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
zVCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
cr DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-
necting the video signal.
cs FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R speakers
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
Speakers A, center, surround, and surround back
speakers.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers A and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers A. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” on page 27 and “Bridging Front
Speakers A” on page 28.
ct MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
dk PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
channel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
woofer.
dl PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3 L/R
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
dm ZONE 2 L/R speakers
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
Zone 2 or front Speakers B.
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front Speakers B and sur-
round back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp
or bridge front Speakers B. See “Bi-amping Front
Speakers A” on page 27 and “Bridging Front
Speakers A” on page 28.
dn AC OUTLET (North American model only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and num-
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV receiver.
See pages 22–50 for hookup information.
15
Remote Controller
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an
obstacle between it and the AV receiver’s remote con-
trol sensor.
Installing the Batteries
1To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
2Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
3Slide the cover shut.
Aiming the Remote Controller
30˚
30˚
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Remote control sensor
STANDBY indicator AV receiver
16
Remote Controller—Continued
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.
■RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
u.
■DVD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control components made by other manufactur-
ers (see page 137).
■CD/CDR/MD Mode
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 137).
■DOCK Mode
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock. You must enter the appropriate remote control
code first (see page 137).
■NET/USB Mode (TX-NR906 only)
This mode is for playing music files on a networked
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or
for listening to Internet radio.
■TV and VCR Modes
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see
page 137).
■CABLE/SAT Mode
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satel-
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 137).
■ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 133).
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV
receiver. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected via u.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
button.
Note:
Some of the remote controller functions described in this
manual may not work as expected with other compo-
nents.
About the Remote Controller Modes
1Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select
a mode.
2Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
RECEIVER/TAPE mode:
see right column
DVD mode: see page 18
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 19
DOCK mode: see page 20
NET/USB mode (TX-NR906 only):
see page 21
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 139
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
RC-
687
M
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
NET/USB
SP A SP B
1
2
bl
8
9
1
bs
bk
3
4
bq
bp
bo
br
bn
bm
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER
6
5
7
*1
*1
ck
bt
cl
cm
DOCK
TX-SR876
(RC-690M)
*1 TX-NR906 only (RC-687M)
17
Remote Controller—Continued
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
aSTANDBY button (51)
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
bON button (51)
Turns on the AV receiver.
cINPUT SELECTOR buttons (70)
Used to select the input source.
dMACRO buttons (141)
Used with the Macro function.
eDIMMER button (71)
Adjusts the display brightness.
fArrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
gCH +/– button (75)
Selects radio presets.
hSETUP button
Used to change settings.
iDISPLAY button (72)
Displays information about the current input source.
jLISTENING MODE buttons (81)
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO],
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently
selected remote controller mode.
kTEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+
buttons (71, 100)
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.
lLIGHT button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
mD.TUN button (74)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
nREMOTE MODE buttons (16)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for
the currently selected mode lights up.
oSLEEP button (72)
Used with the Sleep function.
pVOL [q]/[w] button (70)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.
qRETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
rMUTING button (71)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
sSP A and SP B buttons (TX-NR906 only)
(8, 23)
Used to select Speakers A or Speakers B.
tRe-EQ button (108)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
uL NIGHT button (109)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
vAUDIO SEL button (120)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
■TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1Previous and Next [7]/[6] buttons
The Previous [7] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [6] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [7]/[6] buttons may not work prop-
erly with some cassette tapes.
Play [1] button
Starts playback.
Rewind and Fast Forward [5]/[4]
buttons
The Rewind [5] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [4] button starts fast forward.
Reverse Play [t] button
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [2] button
Stops playback.
REC [y] button
Starts recording.
18
Remote Controller—Continued
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.
aSTANDBY button
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
bON button
Turns on the DVD player.
cNumber buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.
dTOP MENU button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
eArrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
fDISC +/– button
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
gSETUP button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
hDISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
iPlayback buttons
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast
Reverse, Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse,
and Slow Forward.
jREPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback function.
kAUDIO button
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
lOPEN/CLOSE [0] button
Opens and closes the disc tray.
mCLEAR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
nMENU button
Displays a DVD’s menu.
oRETURN button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
pRANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
qPLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
rSUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.
sVIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
DVD Mode
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
DVD
RECEIVER
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
RC-
687
M
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
CD
NET/USB
SP A SP B
bn
br
bt
bp
bo
bq
DVD
bs
bm
2
7
8
6
5
9
3
4
1
bk
bl
19
Remote Controller—Continued
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote con-
troller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 137).
aSTANDBY button
Sets the component to Standby.
bON button
Set the component to On or Standby.
cNumber buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
dArrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used with some components.
eDISC +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
fDISPLAY button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
gPlayback buttons
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast
Reverse, Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
hREC [y] button
Starts recording.
iREPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback function.
jOPEN/CLOSE [0] button
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
kCLEAR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
lRETURN button
Used with some components.
mRANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
nPLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
CD/MD/CDR Modes
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
DVD
RECEIVER
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
RC-
687
M
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
CD
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2
bk
5
3
4
1
CDR/MD/DOCK
CD
bl
bm
bn
bo
6
7
8
9
20
Remote Controller—Continued
Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] (TX-NR906) or
[DOCK] (TX-SR876) REMOTE MODE button to
select the DOCK remote controller mode.
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the
appropriate remote control code (see page 137).
When Using an RI Dock:
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or AUX 1 IN
L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see
page 63).
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
aSTANDBY button
Turns off the iPod.
bON button*
Turns on the iPod.
cTOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
dArrow [q]/[w] and ENTER buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
eALBUM +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.
fDISPLAY button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
gPrevious [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
hPause [3] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
iFast Reverse [5] button
Press and hold to fast reverse.
jPLAYLIST Up/Down [i]/[o] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
kREPEAT button*
Used with the repeat function.
lMENU button*
Used to access menus.
mPlay [1] button
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
nNext [6] button
Selects the next song.
oStop [2] button
Stops playback and displays a menu.
pFast Forward [4] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
qRANDOM button*
Used with the shuffle function.
rPLAY MODE button
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported by 3rd
generation iPods.
DOCK Mode
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
DVD
RECEIVER
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
RC-
687
M
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
CD
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2
7
6
1
bq
bp
br
bs
8
9
bk
bl
bn
bm
CDR/MD/DOCK
CD
DOCK
bo
4
5
3
TX-NR906
(RC-687M)
TX-SR876
(RC-690M)
21
Remote Controller—Continued
NET/USB mode is for playing music files on a net-
worked computer, media server, or USB mass storage
device, or for listening to Internet radio.
To set the remote controller to NET/USB mode, press
the [NET/USB] REMOTE MODE button.
aNumber buttons
Used to enter track numbers.
bArrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
cCH +/– button
Used to select Internet radio stations.
dSETUP button
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.
ePrevious [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
fPause [3] button
Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass
storage device.
gREPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
hRETURN button
Returns to the previous display.
iPlay [1] button
Starts playback.
jNext [6] button
Selects the next song.
kStop [2] button
Stops playback.
lRANDOM button
Used with the random playback function, which can
be used with music files on a networked computer,
media server, or USB mass storage device.
NET/USB Mode (TX-NR906 only)
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
RECEIVER
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
RC-
687
M
CDR/MD/DOCK
NET/USB
DVD CD
NET/USB
SP A SP B
NET/USB
2
7
6
1
8
9
bk
bl
bm
4
5
3
22
About Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With DVDs you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With
analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes. You
can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Enjoying Home Theater
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Position them at the sides of the lis-
tener, or slightly behind, about
2–3 feet (60–100 cm) above ear
level. Ideally they should be equally
spaced from the listener.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the
LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel. The
volume and quality of the bass output from
your subwoofer will depend on its position, the
shape of your listening room, and your listen-
ing position. In general, a good bass sound
can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in
a front corner, or at one-third the way along the
front wall, as shown.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the room
and choose the one that provides the most
satisfying results.
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly
so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
23
Connecting the AV Receiver
About Speakers A and Speakers B (TX-NR906 only)
Speakers A and Speakers B allows you to have two speaker configurations of up to 7.1 speakers. Each configuration has
its own pair of stereo front speakers and can use the same subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back speakers, as
required. You could, for example, use Speakers A when watching a DVD movie with 7.1-channels surround sound and
use Speakers B for serious music listening with a pair of stereo speakers and the subwoofer (2.1-channels).
The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 61 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
Front Speakers A and front Speakers B can be wired normally, bi-amped, or bridged, but A and B cannot be bi-amped
or bridged at the same time. For example, if front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B can only be wired normally.
Similarly, if front Speakers B are bi-amped, Speakers A can only be wired normally. When bridging is used, the AV
receiver can drive 2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you're using a powered subwoofer). When bi-amping is
used, the AV receiver can drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room. See pages 27–30 for more information.
The Speakers A and Speakers B configurations are selected by using the [SP A] and [SP B] buttons on the remote
controller. Only one configuration can be selected at a time.
The versatility offered by the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations means you can configure the AV receiver to
suit your exact requirements and application. Two typical applications are shown below.
■7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A and
Stereo Playback with Speakers B
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is used for serious music listening with a
pair of top-quality stereo speakers.
■7.1-channel Playback with Bridged Front
Speakers
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.1-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is bridged for use with a pair of high-
power stereo speakers, the subwoofer is used with
Speakers A and Speakers B.
Connecting Your Speakers
FL C FR
FL FR
SL
SBL SBR
SW
SR
Speakers A
Speakers B
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
6ohms
Normal
Normal
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Not Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Speaker B
FL C FR
FL FR
SL
SBL SBR
SW
SR
Speakers A
Speakers B
Subwoofer
used with A
and B
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
8ohms
Normal
BTL
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Use
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Speaker B
24
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Speaker Configuration
For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
*If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (see page 64) or manually (see page 95).
Using Dipole Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround
left and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that
their arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the sur-
round back left and right dipolar speakers should be posi-
tioned so that their arrows point toward each other, as
shown.
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s PRE
OUT: SUBWOOFER to the input on your powered sub-
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the PRE OUT:
SUBWOOFER to the amp’s input.
Attaching the Speaker Labels
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All
you need to do then is to match the color of each label to
the corresponding speaker terminal.
For North American model
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker ter-
minal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center
hole of the speaker terminal.
Number of speakers: 2 3 4 5 6 7
Front left ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Front right ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Center ✓✓✓✓
Surround left ✓✓✓✓
Surround right ✓✓✓✓
Surround back* ✓
Surround back left ✓
Surround back right ✓
2
1
34
2
1
34
56
78
5
7 8
6
TV/screen TV/screen
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
Dipole speakers Normal speakers
Speaker terminal Color
Front left, Zone 2 left White
Front right, Zone 2 right Red
Center Green
Surround left Blue
Surround right Gray
Surround back left Brown
Surround back right Tan
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
Powered
subwoofer
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
25
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Speaker Connection Precautions
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 61). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker termi-
nal. Doing so may damage the
AV r e c e iver .
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.
Connecting the Speaker Cables
1Strip about 5/8"
(15 mm) of insulation
from the ends of the
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
2Unscrew the terminal.
3Fully insert the bare wire.
4Screw the terminal tight.
5/8" (15 mm)
26
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
■7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for 7.1-channel playback
with Speakers A.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
■7.1-channel Playback with Speakers A or Speakers B
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for up to 7.1-channel
playback with Speakers A or Speakers B.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Notes:
• When Speakers A is selected, the front left speaker A and front right speaker A become the main front speakers. When
Speakers B is selected, the front left speaker B and front right speaker B become the main front speakers.
• The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 61 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
• You can choose which of the spakers you want to use with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations (see
page 98).
Surround back
left speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Front left speakerFront right speaker Center speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker B
Front right
speaker B
Front left
speaker A
Front right
speaker A Center speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Surround back
left speaker
27
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers A and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers A, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker A)” setting to
“Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 61).
• When front Speakers A are biamped, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers A
1Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
2Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal
to the right speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high)
terminal.
3Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
4Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) ter-
minal.
Woofer (low)
Right speaker Left speaker
Tweeter (high) Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
28
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker A)” setting to
“BTL” to enable bridging (see page 61).
• When front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers A
1Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
2Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
Right speaker Left speaker
29
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front Speakers B and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for front Speakers B, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the ZONE 2 L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” setting to
“Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 61).
• When front Speakers B are biamped, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping Front Speakers B
1Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
2Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal
to the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low)
terminal.
3Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
4Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
minal.
Woofer (low)
Right speaker Left speaker
Tweeter (high) Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
30
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
The ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
using a powered subwoofer).
• For bridging, the positive (+) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative
(–) ZONE 2 L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are
not.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” setting to
“BTL” to enable bridging (see page 61).
• When front Speakers B are bridged, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging Front Speakers B
1Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative terminal.
2Connect the AV receiver’s ZONE 2 L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
terminal.
Right speaker Left speaker
31
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
■North American Model
■Other Models
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 32).
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
Connecting Antenna
1Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
■North American Model
■Other Models
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
AM ANTENNA push terminals
FM ANTENNA jack
AM ANTENNA push terminals
FM ANTENNA jack
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
2Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
1Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
2Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
■North American Model
Thumbtacks, etc.
Push Insert wire Release
32
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 32).
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
■Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
■North American Model
■Other Models
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizon-
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
3■Other Models
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.
Push Insert wire Release
FM 75
To AV receiver To TV (or VCR)
TV/FM antenna splitter
Outdoor antenna
AM loop antenna
Insulated antenna cable
Outdoor antenna
AM loop antenna
Insulated antenna cable
33
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
AV Connection Color Coding
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connec-
tions can cause noise or malfunc-
tions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
AV Cables and Jacks
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.
About AV Connections
Left (white)
Right (red)
(Yellow)
Analog audio
Composite video
Left (white)
Right (red)
(Yellow)
Right!
Wrong!
Video
Cable Jack Description
HDMI
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
Component
video cable
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
S-Video cable
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
and provides better picture quality than composite
video.
Composite
video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Audio
Optical digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
common connection format for analog audio and
can be found on virtually all AV components.
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-
channel cable.
HDMI
YY
C
B
/
P
B
C
R
/
P
R
C
R
/
P
R
C
B
/
P
B
Y
C
B
/P
B
C
R
/P
R
S
V
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
L
R
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURR
MULTI CH
SURR BAC
K
34
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting, which
generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI outputs.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
“Immediate Display” preference to “Off” (see page 116), the “Picture Adjust” setting to the default (see
page 111), and the “Resolution” setting to “Through” (see page 55).
■“Monitor Out” Setting Set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI
Main” or “HDMI Sub” (see page 52), video
input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources all being upcon-
verted for the respective HDMI output. Use the
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to
your TV.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
Connecting Both Audio & Video
: Signal Flow
Video Video
Audio
Speakers (see page 26 for hookup details)
DVD player, etc.
TV, projector,
etc.
Audio
Which Connections Should I Use?
IN
MONITOR OUT
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
TV, projector, etc.
Composite S-Video Component
Video Signal Flow Chart
HDMI
Composite S-Video Component HDMI
35
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
■“Monitor Out” Setting Set to
“Analog”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”
(see page 52), video input signals flow through
the AV receiver as shown, with composite
video and S-Video sources being upconverted
for the component video output. Use this set-
ting if you connect the AV receiver’s COM-
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your
TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor
Out “Resolution” setting is set to “Through” (see page 55).
Video Signal Flow and the
Resolution
Setting
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Ana-
log” (see page 52), if the Monitor Out “Reso-
lution” setting is set to anything other than
“Through” (see page 55), the video signal flow
will be as shown here, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input
signals are not output.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-
ital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
IN
MONITOR OUT
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
TV, projector, etc.
Composite S-Video Component
Video Signal Flow Chart
HDMI
Composite S-Video Component HDMI
IN
MONITOR OUT
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
TV, projector, etc.
Composite S-Video Component
Video Signal Flow Chart
HDMIComposite S-Video Component
HDMIS-Video
*
1
*
2
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
MD recorder, etc.
Optical
Optical
CoaxialMultichannel
Analog
Analog
Audio Signal Flow Chart
HDMI
HDMI
*1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (see page 118).
*2 Only the front L/R channels are output.
36
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 42 for HDMI connection information.
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
and , or and .)
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 39 and 41).
Connecting a TV or Projector
Connection AV receiver Signal flow TV
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT ⇒Component video input
MONITOR OUT S ⇒S-Video input
MONITOR OUT V ⇒Composite video input
GAME/TV IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV) ⇐Digital optical output
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
A B C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c
a
b c
a b a c
A
B
C
a
b
c
YCOAXIAL
OUT
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
PRS VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
IN
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
b
c
A
B
C
B
a
C
TV, projector,
etc.
Connect one or the other
Connection must be assigned (see page 59)
b
Hint!
37
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
and , or and .)
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection .
Connecting a DVD player
Connection AV receiver Signal flow DVD player
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 (DVD) ⇐Component video output
DVD IN S ⇐S-Video output
DVD IN V ⇐Composite video output
DVD IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV) ⇐Digital optical output
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A B C
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c
a
b c
a b a c
a
A
B
C
a
b
c
YCOAXIAL
OUT
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PRS VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
b
c
A
B
C
B
a
C
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 38.
Connect one or the other
Connection must be assigned (see page 59)
c
38
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH:
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 60.
To select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 120. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 118.
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURR
MULTI CH
SURR BACK
R
FRONT
LLR
SURROUND
CENTER SUB
WOOFER
R
L
R
L
LR
SURR
BACK
5.1 ch
7.1 ch
DVD player
39
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVD recorder in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
, or and .)
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback
Connection AV receiver Signal flow VCR or DVD recorder
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 ⇐Component video output
VCR/DVR IN S ⇐S-Video output
VCR/DVR IN V ⇐Composite video output
VCR/DVR IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV) ⇐Digital optical output
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A B C
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c
a
b c a
b a c
A
B
C
a
b
c
YCOAXIAL
OUT
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PRS VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
b
c
A
B
C
B
a
C
Connect one or the other
Connection must be assigned (see page 59)
c
Connection
must be
assigned
(see
page 58)
A
VCR,
DVD recorder
40
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby mode.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVD recorder’s
audio and video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVD recorder for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVD recorder must
be connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording
Connection AV receiver Signal flow VCR or DVD recorder
VCR/DVR OUT S ⇒S-Video input
VCR/DVR OUT V ⇒Composite video input
VCR/DVR OUT L/R ⇒Audio L/R input
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT ⇒Digital optical input
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection. The
video source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
A B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a b
A
B
a
b
S VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
IN
VIDEO
IN
LR
OPTICAL
IN
b
A
a
B
VCR,
DVD recorder
41
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
and , or and .)
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source
Connection AV receiver Signal flow Video source
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 ⇐Component video output
CBL/SAT IN S ⇐S-Video output
CBL/SAT IN V ⇐Composite video output
CBL/SAT IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD) ⇐Digital optical output
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A B C
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c
a
b c
a b a c
A
B
C
a
b
c
YCOAXIAL
OUT
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PRS VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
b
c
A
B
C
B
a
C
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
Connect one or the other
Connection must be assigned (see page 59)
c
42
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible components
will display a picture.
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-
ter Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
Connecting Components with HDMI
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
Repeater System, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD, and Multichannel PCM
43
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
■Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI outputs.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 34 for more information.
■Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see
page 118).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the “Audio TV Out”
setting to “On” (see page 118), and set your DVD player’s “Audio TV Out” put setting to PCM.
Notes:
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In
addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see page 118), or “TV Control” is set to “Enable” (see page 119)
and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver volume control, the sound will be
output by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change
your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected
component’s instruction manual for details.
Step 1:
Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible Blu-ray player/DVD player,
TV, projector, and so on.
Step 2:
Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “Video Input Setup” on page 56.
Hint!
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
TV
Blu-ray player/
DVD player
44
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
and .)
Connecting a Game Console
Connection AV receiver Signal flow Game console
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 ⇐Component video output
GAME/TV IN S ⇐S-Video output
GAME/TV IN V ⇐Composite video output
GAME/TV IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV) ⇐Digital coaxial output
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
A B C
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c
a
b a
b
A
B
C
a
b
YPB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PRS VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
b
A
B
C
B
a
C
Game Console
Connection
must be
assigned (see
page 58)
A
45
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device
Connection AV receiver Signal flow Camcorder
AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO ⇐S-Video output
AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO ⇐Composite video output
AUX 2 INPUT L-AUDIO-R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL ⇐Digital optical output
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
A B
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a b
DIGITAL
S VIDEO
AUX 2 INPUT
AUX 2 INPUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUX 2 INPUT
AUDIO
AUX 2 INPUT
VIDEO
LR
S VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
LR
B
A
a
b
Camcorder, etc.
A
B
a
b
46
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
■CD Player or Turntable (MM) with Built-in Phono Preamp
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use and , or and .)
■Turntable (MM) with no Phono Preamp Built-in
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-
table.
Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable
Connection AV receiver Signal flow CD or turntable
CD IN L/R ⇐Analog audio L/R output
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD) ⇐Digital optical output
IN
L
R
L
R
CD AUDIO
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
LR
COAXIAL
OUT
L
R
IN
(VCR/DVR)
IN 2
COAXIAL
IN 2
(CD)
OPTICAL
CD
b
a
a
c
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( , , or ). Use connection for a turntable with a built-in
phono preamp.
a b c a
Turntable (MM) with
built-in phono preamp
CD player
Connect one
or the other
Connection
must be
assigned
(see page 59)
b
a
b c
a b a c
a
b
c
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
PHONO
R
L
IN
47
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and .
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection .
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Connection AV receiver Signal flow Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
⇐
⇒
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR) ⇐Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD) ⇐Digital optical output
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT ⇒Digital optical input
COAXIAL
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
COAXIAL
OUT
AUDIO
IN
LR
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN 2
(CD)
OPTICAL
IN
L
R
IN
TAPE
AUDIO
OUT
LR
L
R
TAPE
OPTICAL
b
c
a
a
d
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( , , , or ), and then make the connection.
a b c d
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
Connect one
or the other
a
a b a c
d
a
b
c
d
48
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp to the
PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered subwoofer,
connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT: SUBWOOFER jack.
Connecting a Power Amplifier
2 3 4 5 6 71
FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURR
PRE OUT
SURR BACK
SUBWOOFER
1. Front left speaker
2. Center speaker
3. Front right speaker
4. Surround left speaker
5. Surround right speaker
6. Surround back left speaker
7. Surround back right speaker
Power amplifier
See “Connecting a Powered Subwoofer”
on page 24 for more information.
Powered subwoofer
49
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
■If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks, and connect its
video output jack to the AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN V
jack.
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)
■If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)
■If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
• Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s AUX 1 jack.
The AV receiver has AC outlet on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use
with the AV receiver. These components can then be left turned on so
that they turn on and off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or
Standby.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you con-
nect to the AC OUTLET does not exceed the stated capacity.
Notes:
• When the “HDMI Control” setting is set to “Enable” (page 118),
the AC outlet are on all the time regardless of whether the AV
receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any
components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automat-
ically.
• Onkyo components connected via u should be connected
directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Connecting an RI Dock
Not all iPod models output video. For information
about which iPod models are supported by the RI
Dock, see the RI Dock’s instruction manual.
L
R
IN
V
L
R
IN
Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable (see page 50).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see page 63).
• By using the [CD] (TX-NR906) or [DOCK] (TX-SR876) REMOTE MODE button on the remote controller of
the AV receiver to change the remote mode to “DOCK”, you can operate your iPod in the RI Dock (see page 20).
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the appropriate remote control code (see page 137).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)
AC OUTLET
AC 120V
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
60Hz
North American model
50
Connecting the AV Receiver—Continued
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via u, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via u will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 80), as the Direct Change u func-
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other u-capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 138). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver
and not the other component.
Notes:
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two u jacks. You can con-
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
for connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Con-
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause
a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all u functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
Connecting Onkyo u Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary u connections (see illustration below).
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 63).
LR
FRONT
DVD
L
R
IN
CD
L
R
REMOTE
CONTROL
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
LR
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., CD player
e.g., DVD player
Connecting the Power Cord
51
Turning On the AV Receiver
For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF
position ( ).
ON/STANDBY ON/STANDBY
POWER
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
NET/USB
ON
RECEIVER
STANDBY
STANDBY indicator
• North American model • Other models
STANDBY indicator
Turning On and Standby
1Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).
(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)
The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.
2On the AV receiver, press the [ON/STANDBY] button.
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
followed by the [ON] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-
nected via u.
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [ON/STANDBY] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
R
emo
t
e
controller
AV receiver
or
Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ®XT)” on
page 64.
■Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT?
If you did, see “Monitor Out Setup” on page 55.
■Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you did, see “Video Input Setup” on page 56, “Component Video
Setup” on page 58, or “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 59
respectively.
■Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 63.
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Y
PB
PR
HDMI
OUT IN
TAPE MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
52
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or
not to have the video sources’ images output through the
HDMI OUT, as well as whether to have the onscreen
setup menu output through the HDMI OUT or through
an analog output.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to “Ana-
log” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed and
composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted*
and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” so that the onscreen
setup menus are displayed and composite video, S-
Video, and component video sources are upconverted*
and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB. The onscreen setup menus are displayed on the
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB only.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB and COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have the AV receiver
upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match
the resolution supported by your TV (see page 111).
Note:
See page 34 for charts showing how the “Monitor Out”
and “Resolution” (see pages 55, 56) settings affect the
video signal flow through the AV receiver.
Monitor Setup
1, 2
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
Component video
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
HDMI
1Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
The current setting is displayed.
2Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
HDMI Main:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
HDMI Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Note:
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
is selected, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI outputs.
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-
appear, press the [HDMI OUT] but-
ton to select “Analog”.
53
First Time Setup—Continued
In this Instruction Manual, illustrations from the onscreen menu or explanations referring to the menu will be in the
same language as the Instruction Manual. The default Language setting for the onscreen menu is English. If your
Instruction Manual is in a language other than English, first follow the instructions below to change the Language.
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
Selecting the Language used for the
onscreen setup menus
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [ q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
Note:
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not
available on the North American mod-
els.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
Language
On
16 : 9
Bottom
Auto
English
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Language”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
English, German, French, Spanish,
Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Japanese
5Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
54
First Time Setup—Continued
Carry out the settings for the AV receiver by using the
Onscreen Setup Menu.
■Menus for First Time Setup
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus
1Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select submenu and then
press [ENTER].
The submenu appears.
Press the [SETUP] button to close the
menu.
Press the [RETURN] button to return to
the previous menu.
INPUT
SELECTOR
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
PLAYLIST
RANDOMREC
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
SP A SP B
2
1
1
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MENU
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
*
p. 55
p. 59
p. 61
p. 62
p. 63
Submenus
Main menu
* TX-NR906 only
55
First Time Setup—Continued
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“Analog” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed
and composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively, so that the
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or
HDMI OUT SUB.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as
necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Monitor Out Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2, 3 2–
5
1
1, 6
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Monitor Out”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Monitor Out” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Monitor Out”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
HDMI Main:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
HDMI Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Note:
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
is selected, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI outputs.
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-
appear, press the AV receiver’s
[HDMI OUT] button so that “Moni-
tor Out: Analog” appears on the dis-
play.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
1–1. Monitor Out
Monitor Out
Resolution
Brightness
Contrast
Hue
Saturation
Analog
Through
0
0
0
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
56
First Time Setup—Continued
Notes:
• See page 35 for charts showing how the “Monitor
Out” and “Resolution” settings affect the video signal
flow through the AV receiver.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
HDMI Input Setup
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted* and output by the HDMI outputs. You can
set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -”
option.
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Resolution”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Through:
Select this to pass video through the
AV receiver at the same resolution
and with no conversion.
Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver
automatically convert video at reso-
lutions not supported by your TV.
(Not available when the “Monitor
Out” setting is set to “Analog”.)
480p:
Select this for 480p output and
video conversion as necessary.
720p:
Select this for 720p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080i:
Select this for 1080i output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080p:
Select this for 1080p output and
video conversion as necessary. (Not
available when the “Monitor Out”
setting is set to “Analog”.)
Source:
Output will be according to the res-
olution level which was set with
Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for
each Source becomes possible.)
6Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
Video Input Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
HDMI
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
57
First Time Setup—Continued
Notes:
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI
OUT SUB, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively (see
page 55), and the “HDMI Input” setting must be set to
“- - -”. See page 34 for more information on video sig-
nal flow and upconversion.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 59.
• The “TUNER” input selector cannot be assigned and
is fixed at the “- - -” option.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. HDMI Input”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “HDMI Input” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4:
Select the HDMI IN to which the
video component has been con-
nected.
- - -:
Output composite video, S-Video,
and component video sources from
the HDMI OUT. The video output
signal from the HDMI OUT is the
one configured in “Component
Video Setup” (see page 58).
Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to
more than one input selector. When
HDMI1 - HDMI4 have already been
assigned, you must set first any unused
input selectors to “- - -” or you will be
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI4 to
input selector.
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1–2. HDMI Input
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
58
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Setup
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors are assigned to the “- - -” option.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
verted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-
ITOR OUT. You can set this for each input selector by
selecting the “- - -” option.
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the
“Monitor Out” setting must be set to “Analog” (see
page 55), and the “Component Video Input” setting
must be set to “- - -”. See page 35 for more informa-
tion on video signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Input selector Default assignment
DVD IN1
VCR/DVR ---
CBL/SAT ---
GAME/TV ---
AUX1 ---
AUX2 ---
TAPE - - -
TUNER - - - (Fixed)
CD ---
PHONO ---
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
Component video
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Component
Video Input”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Component Video Input” menu
appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
IN1: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 1.
IN2: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Use the video component
connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 3.
---: Output composite video and
S-Video sources from the
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT.
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
1–3. Component Video Input
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
IN1
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
59
First Time Setup—Continued
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the “CD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
Notes:
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input
selector.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Digital Audio Input Setup
Input selector Default assignment
DVD COAX1
VCR/DVR COAX2
CBL/SAT COAX3
GAME/TV OPT1
AUX1 - - -
AUX2 FRONT (Fixed)
TAPE - - -
TUNER - - - (Fixed)
CD OPT2
PHONO - - -
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Digital Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Digital Audio Input” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
1–4. Digital Audio Input
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
- - -
FRONT
- - -
- - -
OPT2
- - -
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
“COAX1”, “COAX2”, “COAX3”,
“OPT1”, “OPT2”, or “- - - (ana-
log)”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an
input selector in “HDMI Input
Setup” on page 56, this input assign-
ment is automatically set to the same
HDMI IN. And in addition to the
usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI
inputs. If you change the input
assignment from an HDMI IN to one
of the other inputs (e.g., COAX1 or
COAX2), be sure to set the “Using
the DIGITAL INPUT Button” on
page 64 to the same input (e.g.,
COAX1 or COAX2).
• “AUX2” is used only for digital input
from the front panel terminals. When
HDMI IN is assigned to “AUX2” in
the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 56,
the same HDMI IN can be selected.
Examples:
If you connect your DVD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1 jack, set “DVD” to
“OPT1”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the OPTICAL
IN 2 jack when the VCR/DVR input
selector is selected, set “VCR/DVR” to
“OPT2”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the COAX-
IAL IN 1 jack when the CBL/SAT
input selector is selected, set
“CBL/SAT” to “COAX1”.
For input selectors that you don’t want
to assign a digital input jack, set to
“- - - (analog)”.
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
60
First Time Setup—Continued
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector. Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-
edly to select Multich (see page 120).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Analog Audio Input Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2, 3 2–
4
1
1, 5
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “5. Analog Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Analog Audio Input” menu
appears.
4Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors:
“DVD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/SAT”,
“GAME/TV”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,
“TAPE”, “CD”, or “PHONO”.
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1–5. Analog Audio Input
Multich DVD
VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
61
First Time Setup—Continued
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
“Speaker Type” setting. For hookup information, see
pages 27–30.
Notes:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-
ume.
Speaker Settings
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
2, 3
1
1, 7
2–
6
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-
matic speaker setup again (see page 64).
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Speaker Set-
tings”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Speaker imped-
ance”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Front(Speaker
A)”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A normally.
Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A for bi-amped
operation.
BTL:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers A for bridged opera-
tion. The BTL indicator will appear
on the display.
Note:
“Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Front(Speaker B)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker impedance
Speaker Type
Front(Speaker A)
Front(Speaker B)
6ohms
Normal
Not Use
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
62
First Time Setup—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Front(Speaker
B)”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Not Use:
Select this if you’re not using
Speakers B.
Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B normally.
Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B for bi-amped
operation.
BTL:
Select this if you’ve connected your
front Speakers B for bridged opera-
tion. The BTL indicator will appear
on the display.
Note:
“Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Front(Speaker A)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
7Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
Note:
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not
available on the North American mod-
els.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “TV Format”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
Language
On
16 : 9
Bottom
Auto
English
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
63
First Time Setup—Continued
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u
to work properly, you must change this setting.
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
Note:
DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
AUX 1 input selector, but not both at the same time.
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [ENTER].
The “Tuner” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “AM Freq Step”,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
7–3. Tuner
AM Freq Step 9kHz
VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
Changing the Input Display
1
or
Press the [TAPE] or [AUX 1] input
selector button so that “TAPE” or
“AUX1” appears on the display.
2
(3 seconds)
or
(3 seconds)
Press and hold down the [TAPE]
or [AUX 1] input selector button
(about 3 seconds) to change the
setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the TAPE input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
For the AUX 1 input selector, the set-
ting changes in this order: AUX1 ↔
DOCK
1, 2 1, 2
TAPE → MD → CDR
DOCK
→
→
64
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button
Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT automatically determines the number of
speakers connected, their size for purposes of bass
management, optimum crossover frequencies to the
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary
listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ
XT
then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
problems over the listening area in both the frequency
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced
sound for everyone. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ
XT
allows you to also use Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, which
maintains the proper octave-to-octave balance at any
volume level.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
If Audyssey Dynanic EQ is set to “Enable”,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ becomes available.
1Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
2Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton.
The current assignment is displayed.
3Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-
ton repeatedly to select an
option.
Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 59.
1
2, 3
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ®XT)
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
monitors how the volume of program material is
being perceived by listeners in real time to decide
whether an adjustment is needed. Whenever
necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary
rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired
playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic
range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same whether watching movies,
flipping between television channels, or changing
from stereo to surround sound content.
About Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
response, tonal balance, and surround impression
that remain constant despite changes in volume.
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
source levels with actual output sound levels in the
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
65
First Time Setup—Continued
Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in your home theater
that all listeners will enjoy, Audysssey MultEQ® takes
measurements at up to eight positions within the lis-
tening area.
■1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
Using Audyssey MultEQ® XT
TV TV TV
TVTVTV
TV TV TV
–
: listening area : listening position
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
SURR
STEREO
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
3–10
SETUP MIC
1
2, 11
Notes:
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
“Speaker impedance” setting before running the
automatic speaker setup (see page 61).
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
• Automatic speaker setup can only be used with
Speakers A.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected, or Speak-
ers B is selected.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
surement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
66
First Time Setup—Continued
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
1Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
2Place the speaker setup micro-
phone at measurement point 1
(page 64), and connect it to the
SETUP MIC jack.
Notes:
•
Before starting Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT
Automatic Speaker Setup, arrange
the room and connect the speakers as
you would for enjoying movies.
Changes to the room after auto setup
requires you run the auto setup again,
as room EQ characteristics may have
changed.
• When starting the automatic speaker
setup, do not stand between the
speakers and microphone, and avoid
obstacles blocking the path between
speakers and microphone. This will
produce inaccurate results.
• Position the microphone at ear height
of a seated listener with the micro-
phone tip pointed directly at the ceil-
ing using a tripod. Do not hold the
microphone in your hand during
measurements as this will produce
innacurate results.
• Make the room as quiet as possible.
Background noise can disrupt the
room measurements. Close win-
dows, silence cell phones, televi-
sions, radios, air conditioners,
fluorescent lights, home appliances,
light dimmers, or other devices.
• Cell phones should be turned off or
placed away from all audio electron-
ics during the measurement process
as Radio Frequency Interference
(RFI) may cause measurement dis-
ruptions (even if the cell phone is not
in use).
Auto Speaker Setup
Please place microphone at center of listening area at
ear height.
Next
ENTER
ENTER
1
3Press [ENTER].
The automatic speaker setup starts.
Test tones are played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Automatic Speaker Setup runs. This
process takes a few minutes. Please
refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand
between speakers and the microphone.
4The speaker detect results
appear.
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons
to select “Next”, and then press
[ENTER].
The options are:
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
5The following screen appears.
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 65),
and then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
Auto Speaker Setup
Do not unplug Setup Mic.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
2
Auto Speaker Setup
Speaker Detect Result
Next
Retry
Cancel
:Yes :No
ENTER
ENTER
MOVE
Auto Speaker Setup
Please place microphone at next position at ear height.
Next
ENTER
ENTER
2
Auto Speaker Setup
Do not unplug Setup Mic.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
2
67
First Time Setup—Continued
Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
“Equalizer Settings” (page 102) will be set to Audys-
sey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
6When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
7After the 3rd or 7th measure-
ment, the following screen
appears.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
Next:
Select “Next” to begin measuring
the next measurement position.
After the 8th measurement has been
taken, the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish(Calculate):
Select this if you don’t want to
measure any more listening posi-
tions and are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.
8When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
9When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup
Select [Next] to measure the next position, or select
[Finish] to calculate the Audyssey MultEQ room EQ
solution.
Next
Finish(Calculate )
ENTER
ENTER
MOVE
Calculating...
Auto Speaker Setup
Auto Speaker Setup
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
MOVE
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
Save:
Save the calculated settings and exit
the automatic speaker setup.
Review SP Config:
Review the speaker configuration
settings (see “Reviewing the
Results” on page 69).
Review SP Distance:
Review the speaker distance set-
tings (see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 69).
Review SP Level:
Review the speaker level settings
(see “Reviewing the Results” on
page 69).
Cancel:
Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
10 If you selected “Save”, the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
11 Disconnect the setup MIC.
Auto Speaker Setup
Saving...
Auto Speaker Setup
Please, unplug Setup Mic.
68
First Time Setup—Continued
Error Messages
While the automatic speaker setup is in progress, one of
the following error messages may appear:
❑Ambient noise is too high
This message appears if the background noise is too
loud and the measurements cannot be performed
properly.
Remove the source of the noise and try again.
Retry: Return to the measured point immediately
before and start set up again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
❑Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
The front right speaker has not been detected.
The surround right speaker has not been detected.
The surround back left speaker has not been detected.
There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.
The number of speakers detected on the second or
third measurement was different to the number
detected on the first measurement.
Make sure speakers that cannot be detected are con-
nected property.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
❑Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails.
Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, the AV receiver is probably malfunctioning.
Contact your Onkyo dealer.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.
Auto Speaker Setup
Ambient noise is too high.
Retry
Cancel
ENTER
!
ENTER
MOVE
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
:Error
ENTER
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
MOVE
!
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
:Error
ENTER
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
MOVE
!
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
:Error
ENTER
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
MOVE
!
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
:Error
ENTER
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
MOVE
!
Auto Speaker Setup
Next
Cancel
:Yes
:---
:No
:Error
ENTER
ENTER
Speaker Detect Error
!
MOVE
!
!
Auto Speaker Setup
Speaker Detect Error
Retry
Cancel
ENTER
!
ENTER
MOVE
Auto Speaker Setup
Writing Error!
Retry
Cancel
ENTER
!
ENTER
MOVE
69
First Time Setup—Continued
Reviewing the Results Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
In rare situations, proper measurements taken may not
be obtainable by the by the automatic speaker setup. For
example, there may be too much noise in the room. If
running the speaker setup a second time is still unsuc-
cessful you will have to set the speaker settings manu-
ally. (see pages 95–102).
Notes:
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 95).
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by the automatic speaker setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review SP Config”
screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s volume to the
half-way point, set it to its highest crossover frequency,
and then try running the automatic speaker setup again.
Note that if the volume is set too high and the sound dis-
torts, detection issues may occur, so use an appropriate
volume level. If the subwoofer has a low-pass filter
switch, set it to Off or Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s
instruction manual for details.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [ENTER].
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance set-
tings.
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-
vious screen.
Auto Speaker Setup
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
MOVE
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
RETURN
RETURN
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Rightr
Surr Right
SurrBack
Surr Left
Subwoofer
RETURN
RETURN
15.0ft
15.0ft
15.0ft
7.0ft
7.0ft
7.0ft
15.0ft
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Level
Left
Center
Rightr
Surr Right
SurrBack
Surr Left
Subwoofer
RETURN
RETURN
+12.0dB
0.0dB
-12.0dB
+3.0dB
+4.0dB
-3.0dB
0.0dB
70
Basic Operations
Selecting the Input Source
4
1
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
SURR
STEREO
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
4
2
1
1
1Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
buttons.
2To switch between Speakers A and Speak-
ers B, use the remote controller’s [SP A] and
[SP B] buttons (TX-NR906 only).
3Start playback on the source component.
When you select DVD or another video component, on your TV, you’ll need to select
the video input that’s connected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
TOR OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT SUB, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to turn on the digital audio output.
4To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control, or the remote
controller’s VOL [q]/[w] button.
The volume can be set to −∞ dB, −81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The AV receiver is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,
allowing precise adjustment.
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on
page 115.
5Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 81.
R
emo
t
e
controller
AV receiver
Remote
controller A and B indicators
R
emo
t
e
controller
AV receiver
71
Basic Operations—Continued
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the
“Speaker Config” cannot be adjusted (see page 95).
■Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
Tip:
• You can specify how much the output is muted with
the “Muting Level” setting (see page 115).
Setting the Display Brightness
Remote
controller
AV receiver
Press the remote controller’s
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to
select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[DIMMER] button (not European mod-
els).
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
MUTING
CH SEL LEVEL – +
SLEEP
DIMMER
DISPLAY
PHONES DIMMER DISPLAY
Press
[RECEIVER]
first
Adjusting Speaker Levels
Use the remote controller’s
[CH SEL] button to select each
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
the volume.
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
Muting the AV Receiver
Press the remote controller’s
[MUTING] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display, as
shown.
To unmute the AV receiver, press the
[MUTING] button again, or adjust the
volume.
The Mute function is cancelled when
the AV receiver is set to Standby.
72
Basic Operations—Continued
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
off automatically after a specified period.
If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP]
button repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,
press the [
SLEEP
] button. Note that if you press the
[
SLEEP
] button while the sleep time is being displayed,
you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
PHONES jack.
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
• Only the Stereo, Direct, Pure Audio, and Mono listen-
ing modes can be used with headphones (the listening
modes available also depend on the currently selected
input source).
• When the multichannel input is used, only the front
left and right audio can be heard in the headphones.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening
mode is selected.
■Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the
front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by
the front speakers from –10 dB to +10dB in 1dB steps.
Notes:
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
• The tone can be adjusted for Speakers A or Speakers
B. The same values are used for both.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the Direct,
Pure Audio, or THX listening modes.
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
The following information can typically be displayed:
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is displayed.
If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed.
If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal format and
the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input sig-
nals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of
channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the previ-
ously displayed information reappears.
Using the Sleep Timer
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [SLEEP] but-
ton repeatedly to select the
required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set. The specified sleep time appears on
the display for about five seconds, then
the previous display reappears.
Using Headphones
Adjusting the Bass & Treble
1Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
2Use the Up [r] and Down [e]
buttons to adjust.
Displaying Source Information
Remote
controller
AV receiver
Press the [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Input source
Listening
mode
Signal format*
Sampling
frequency
73
Listening to the Radio
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■Auto Tuning Mode
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO
indicator will not appear on models that have HD
Radio.)
■Manual Tuning Mode
The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
(Actual display depends on country.)
1Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
2Press the TUNING Up or Down
[q]/[w] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
TUNING
TUNER
TUNING MODE
Band Frequency
AUTO
TUNED
FM STEREO
1Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the display.
2Press and hold the TUNING Up or
Down [q]/[w] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
74
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
Note:
When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 110), its name is displayed instead of the band and
frequency.
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.
(Actual display depends on country.)
2Within 8 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
M
E
N
U
M
E
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
NET/USB
D.TUN
RECEIVER
Number
buttons
Press the [DISPLAY] button to
display the available information.
DISPLAY
Band
Listening mode
Frequency Preset #
75
Listening to the Radio—Continued
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM and FM radio stations.
Note:
You can name your radio presets for easy identification
(see page 110).
Selecting Presets
Deleting Presets
Presetting AM/FM Stations
1Tune into the AM or FM station
you want to store as a preset.
2Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.
3While the preset number is flash-
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [e]/[r] buttons to
select a preset from 1 through 40.
4Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite stations.
2, 4 3
To select a preset, use the PRE-
SET [e]/[r] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
1Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
2While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the [TUNING
MODE] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
CH +/–
PRESET
2
76
Listening to the Radio—Continued
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple
programs on the same frequency by using multicast
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song
title, artist name, and so on.
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:
www.ibiquity.com
www.hdradio.com
About HD Radio Stations
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see
page 73). You can store them as presets just like AM and
FM stations (see page 75).
If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-
nology, the HD indicator lights up.
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG
indicator lights up.
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio
technology, the station’s name will be displayed
instead of the band and frequency.
• When music data is received, song title and artist
name information is displayed.
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast
channel will be displayed.
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
(North American model only)
HD indicator
HD Radio channel number
Station name
Artist nameSong title
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
DISPLAY
ENTER
AUDIO SEL
,
AUDIO SEL
ENTER DISPLAY
77
Listening to the Radio—Continued
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-
cator appears.
■What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-
able in most European countries. RDS is approved by the
National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) and is
available in North America.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to dis-
playing text information, RDS can also help you find
radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
ing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for
3 seconds.
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 78).
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 78).
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 78).
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Using RDS
RDS indicator
Type Display
None NONE
News reports NEWS
Current affairs AFFAIRS
Information INFO
Sport SPORT
Education EDUCATE
Drama DRAMA
Culture CULTURE
Science and technology SCIENCE
Varied VARIED
Pop music POP M
Rock music ROCK M
Middle of the road music EASY M
Light classics LIGHT M
Serious classics CLASSICS
Other music OTHER M
Weather WEATHER
Finance FINANCE
Children’s programmes CHILDREN
Social affairs SOCIAL
Religion RELIGION
Phone in PHONE IN
Travel TRAVEL
Leisure LEISURE
Jazz music JAZZ
Country music COUNTRY
National music NATION M
Oldies music OLDIES
Folk music FOLK M
Documentary DOCUMENT
Alarm test TEST
Alarm ALARM
78
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for radio stations by type.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
1Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
2Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
3Use the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
See the table on page 77.
RT/PTY/TP
24, 5
3 1
4To start the search, press
[ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before con-
tinuing with the search.
5When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [ENTER].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
1Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
2Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
If the current radio station is broadcast-
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
3To locate a station that is broad-
casting TP, press [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
2 1
3
79
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Multicast Channels
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs
on the same frequency by using what are called multicast
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-
vices) indicator lights up.
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-
sions of their programs and you can choose which one
you want to listen to.
Note:
Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select multi-
cast channel #1 first.
Displaying HD Radio Information
Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to cycle through
the available information.
1Press [ENTER].
The SPS indicator flashes.
2Use the Up and Down Arrow
[q]/[w] buttons to select a multi-
cast channel.
If you select a multicast channel that is
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]
symbol will appear, indicating that the
channel has been reserved. When
broadcasting commences, that channel
will be selected automatically.
Within 5 seconds, press [ENTER] to set
the multicast channel.
Note:
Multicast channels are not available on
AM.
Remote
controller
AV receiver
Use the [AUDIO SEL] button to
select “Auto” or “Analog”.
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-
nal.
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-
nal.
Reserved channel indication
HD Radio channel number
Station information
Artist information
Song title information
Frequency
80
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer
to the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-
nals, so select another mode when recording.
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 33 to 50
for hookup information.
Note:
If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
Recording the Input Source
1
Remote
controller
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 34 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
You can watch the source while record-
ing it. The AV receiver’s MASTER
VOLUME control has no effect on
recording.
2On your recorder, start record-
ing.
3On the source component, start
playback.
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
+10
123
456
789
0
NET/USB
Recording from Different AV Sources
1Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
2Prepare the VCR for recording.
3Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
4Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
5Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
Camcorder
video signal
audio signal
CD Player VCR
81
Using the Listening Modes
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 88.
Selecting on the AV Receiver
■[PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only video signals input
through HDMI IN can be output. Pressing this but-
ton again will select the previous listening mode.
■[STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■[THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
Selecting with the Remote Controller
■[STEREO] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■[SURR] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
ing modes.
■LISTENING MODE [e]/[r] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.
■[PURE A] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only video signals input
through HDMI IN can be output.
■[DIRECT] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■[THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■[ALL ST] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.
Selecting the Listening Modes
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-
tion” on page 72.
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
PURE AUDIO
STEREO
LISTENING MODE
THX
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
SP A SP B
,
STEREO
PURE A
DIRECT THX
ALL ST
SURR
82
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Analog and PCM Sources
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format
Analog/PCM Multi
channel
Analog
Multichannel PCM
32–96
kHz*1
*1. 32/44.1/48/88.2/96kHz
176.4/
192kHz*2
*2. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
32–96 kHz*1 176.4/192 kHz*2
Multi
channel 2ch Mono/Mul
tiplex
Multi
channel 2ch Mono/Mul
tiplex
CD, TV, radio, DVD DVD DVD
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔ ✔✔✔
Multichannel ✔✔ ✔
Neo:6 ✔*4
Neural THX ✔*7 ✔*5*7
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔✔*4
*4. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3 ✔✔*4 ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3 ✔✔
Dolby EX ✔*4
Neo:6 Cinema ✔✔
Neo:6 Music ✔✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*5
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema*5 ✔*3 ✔*4 ✔*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*5 ✔*3 ✔*4 ✔*3
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*5 ✔*3 ✔*3
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+THX Cinema/Music*5 ✔✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*4
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*4
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*4
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*5 ✔✔*7 ✔*7
MonoMovie*5*6
*6. PCM of 88.2kHz and 96kHz are processed at 44.1kHz and 48kHz respectively.
*7. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
✔ ✔✔✔
Orchestra*5*6 ✔ ✔✔✔
Unplugged*5*6 ✔ ✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*5*6 ✔✔✔✔
TV Logic*5*6 ✔ ✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔ ✔✔✔
FullMono ✔ ✔✔✔
T-D*6 ✔ ✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
83
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel 2ch Mono/Multiplex Multichannel 2ch Mono/Multiplex
DVD, DTV, etc. Blu-ray, HD DVD
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Neo:6 ✔*3 ✔*3
Neural THX ✔✔*4 ✔✔
*4
DolbyDigital ✔
DolbyDigital Plus ✔*1
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔*3
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔✔*3 ✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2 ✔*3 ✔✔*3 ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2 ✔✔
Dolby EX ✔*3 ✔✔*3
Neo:6 Cinema ✔✔
Neo:6 Music ✔✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*4
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
✔✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema*4 ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔*3 ✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*4 ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔*3 ✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*4 ✔*2 ✔*2
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music*4 ✔✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*3 ✔*3
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*3 ✔*3
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*3 ✔*3
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
MonoMovie*4 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Orchestra*4 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Unplugged*4 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*4 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
TV Logic*4 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔✔✔✔✔✔
FullMono ✔✔✔✔✔✔
T-D ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
84
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format DTS, DTS96/24 DTS-ES
Discrete/Matrix
Multichannel 2ch Mono
DVD, CD, etc. DVD, CD, etc.
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔✔✔✔
DTS, DTS 96/24 ✔ ✔
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix ✔*1
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
Neo:6 ✔*3
Neural THX ✔*5 ✔*4*5
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔*3
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2 ✔*3 ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2 ✔
Dolby EX ✔*3
Neo:6 Cinema ✔✔
Neo:6 Music ✔✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*4
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
✔
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix*4
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games ✔*1
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema/Music*4 ✔*3 ✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*4 ✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*4 ✔*2
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music*4 ✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*3
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*3
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*3
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4 ✔*5 ✔*5
MonoMovie*4 *5
*5. DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
✔✔✔✔
Orchestra*4*5 ✔✔✔✔
Unplugged*4*5 ✔✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*4*5 ✔✔✔✔
TV Logic*4*5 ✔✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔✔✔✔
FullMono ✔✔✔✔
T-D*5 ✔✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
85
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD Sources
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format TrueHD TrueHD 192kHz
Multichannel 2ch Mono/Multiplex Multichannel 2ch Mono/Multiplex
Blu-ray, HD DVD Blu-ray, HD DVD
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔✔✔
TrueHD ✔✔
Neo:6 ✔*2
Neural THX ✔*4 ✔*3*4
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*1
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔*2
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*1 ✔*2 ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*1 ✔
Dolby EX ✔*2
Neo:6 Cinema ✔
Neo:6 Music ✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*3
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema*3 ✔*2 ✔*1
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*3 ✔*2 ✔*1
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*3 ✔*1
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music*3 ✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*2
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Cinema ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*2
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*2
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*3 ✔*4 ✔*4
MonoMovie*3 ✔✔✔
Orchestra*3 ✔✔✔
Unplugged*3 ✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*3 ✔✔✔
TV Logic*3 ✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔✔✔
FullMono ✔✔✔
T-D ✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
86
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format
DTS-HD High Resolution DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio 192kHz
Multi
channel 2ch Mono Multi
channel 2ch Mono Multi
channel 2ch Mono
Blu-ray, HD DVD Blu-ray, HD DVD Blu-ray, HD DVD
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔✔✔✔✔✔
DTS-HD High Resolution ✔
DTS-HD Master Audio ✔✔
Neo:6 ✔*2 ✔*2
Neural THX ✔*4 ✔*3*4 ✔*4 ✔*3*4
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*1
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔*2
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔✔*2 ✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*1 ✔*2 ✔✔*2 ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*1 ✔✔
Dolby EX ✔*2 ✔*2
Neo:6 Cinema ✔✔
Neo:6 Music ✔✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*3
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.
✔✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema*3 ✔*2 ✔*1 ✔*2 ✔*1
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*3 ✔*2 ✔*1 ✔*2 ✔*1
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*3 ✔*1 ✔*1
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music*3 ✔✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*2 ✔*2
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*2 ✔*2
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*2 ✔*2
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*3 ✔*4 ✔*4 ✔*4 ✔*4
MonoMovie*3 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Orchestra*3 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Unplugged*3 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*3 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
TV Logic*3 ✔✔✔✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔✔✔✔✔✔
FullMono ✔✔✔✔✔✔
T-D ✔✔✔✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
87
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS Express and DSD Sources
If you can select PCM or DSD output on your SACD player, in some cases, selecting PCM will provide
the best sound quality.
Note:
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.
✔: Available Listening Modes
Source format
DTS Express DSD*1
*1. DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
Multichannel 2ch Mono Multichannel
(3/2.1) 2ch
Blu-ray, HD DVD SACD
Pure Audio ✔✔✔✔✔
Direct ✔✔✔✔✔
Stereo ✔✔✔✔✔
Mono ✔✔✔✔✔
DTS Express ✔
DSD ✔
Neo:6 ✔*3 ✔
Neural THX ✔✔*4 ✔✔*4
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
✔*3
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.
✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2 ✔*3 ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2 ✔✔
Dolby EX ✔*3 ✔
Neo:6 Cinema ✔✔
Neo:6 Music ✔✔
THX Cinema/Music/Games*4
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
✔✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie
+ THX Cinema*4 ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music
+ THX Music*4 ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔✔*2
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game
+ THX Games*4 ✔*2 ✔*2
Neo:6 Cinema/Music
+ THX Cinema/Music*4 ✔✔
Neo:6 + THX
Cinema/Music/Game ✔*3 ✔
PLII Game
+ THX Ultra2 Games ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔*3 ✔
THX Ultra2
Cinema/Music/Games ✔*3 ✔
Neural THX
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games
*4 ✔✔ ✔✔
MonoMovie*4 ✔✔✔✔✔
Orchestra*4 ✔✔✔✔✔
Unplugged*4 ✔✔✔✔✔
Studio-Mix*4 ✔✔✔✔✔
TV Logic*4 ✔✔✔✔✔
AllChStereo ✔✔✔✔✔
FullMono ✔✔✔✔✔
T-D ✔✔✔✔✔
Listening Mode
Media
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
: Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Hint!
88
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Pure Audio
Button:
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity reproduction. (As the video circuitry is
turned off, only video signals input through HDMI IN
can be output.)
Note:
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
Direct
Button:
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo
Button:
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and
subwoofer.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of some
movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other sources
containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke DVDs.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for
7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops
the listener. As well as music and movies, video games
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and
vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of
Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo, and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
5.1-channel source + Dolby EX
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz sampling rate.
About the Listening Modes
The LISTENING MODE button illustration shows
that listening modes can be selected.
Button:
The LISTENING MODE button illustration shows
the remote controller buttons with the exception of
the [PURE A] button (All buttons with the exception
of the [PURE A] button are on both the AV receiver
and the remote controller).
See “Selecting the Listening Modes” on page 81 for
information on the use of the LISTENING MODE
buttons.
PURE A
PURE AUDIO
PURE A
DIRECT
STEREO
89
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Dolby TrueHD
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-chan-
nels with 192 kHz sampling rate.
For the signals supported by the AV receiver, see
page 84.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode to
expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Movie
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
DTS-ES Discrete
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks,
which use a discrete surround back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
crete soundtrack.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks,
which use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.
DTS Neo:6
This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-
channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels
of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, provid-
ing a very natural and seamless surround sound experi-
ence that fully envelops the listener.
•Neo:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
5.1-channel source + Neo:6
This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz sampling rate.
DTS-HD Master Audio
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels
with 192 kHz sampling rate.
For the signals supported by the AV receiver, see
page 86.
DTS Express
This format supports up to 5.1 channels and a lower sam-
pling rate of 48 kHz. Applications include interactive
audio and commentary encoding for HD DVD Sub
Audio and Blu-ray Secondary Audio. Also broadcast
and media servers.
90
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
home-theater environment. They can be used with 2-
channel matrixed and multichannel sources.
Surround back speaker output depends on the source
material and the selected listening mode.
•THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks
for playback in a home theater environment. In this
mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive
Decorrelation are active.
•THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music,
which is typically mastered at significantly higher
levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loudness
Plus is configured for music playback and only Tim-
bre Matching is active.
•THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate
playback of game audio, which is often mixed simi-
larly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX
Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels,
with Timbre Matching active.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
• THX Ultra2 Music
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Ultra2 Games
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
• THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
91
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image, and simulates the natural reverberation of
a large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. This works
by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and
right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
92
Advanced Setup
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized into eight catego-
ries on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be
slightly different from what you see on your TV.
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
Menu Map
MENU
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Lock Setup
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
3. Audio Adjust
1. Tone Control
2. DSD
3. Multiplex/Mono
4. PLIIx/Neo:6
5. Dolby EX
6. Theater-Dimensional
7. LFE Level
4. Source Setup
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
4. Picture Adjust
5. Satellite Radio
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock
DVD
5. Listening Mode Preset
1. DVD
2. VCR/DVR
3. CBL/SAT
4. GAME/TV
5. AUX1
6. AUX2
7. TAPE
8. TUNER
9. CD
10. PHONO
11. NET/USB
8. Lock Setup
Lock Unlocked
Main menu Submenu
☞
pages 55–60
☞
pages 95–104
☞
page 105
☞
page 114
☞
pages 109–110
page 61
☞
page 115
☞
page 117
☞
page 119
page 62
page 63
93
Advanced Setup—Continued
This section explains items on the “Input/Output
Assign” menu.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, zand
[ENTER] button.
Monitor Out Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2, 3 2–
4
1
1, 5
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
The items are explained below.
5When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
94
Advanced Setup—Continued
Monitor Out
Resolution
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture res-
olution as necessary to match the resolution supported
by your TV.
Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
Contrast
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Hue
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–20” is the strongest green.
“+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation
With this setting you can adjust saturation.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the weakest color.
“+50” is the strongest color.
Gamma
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G
(green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color
data signal.
Can be adjusted from –3 to +3 in steps of 1 (default is 0).
R Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
R Contrast
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
GBrightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
G Contrast
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
B Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
B Contrast
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV
receiver at the same resolution and with no
conversion (default).
Auto: Select this to have the AV receiver automat-
ically convert video at resolutions not sup-
ported by your TV.
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” set-
ting is set to “Analog”.)
480p (480/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output and
video conversion as necessary.
720p: Select this for 720p output and video con-
version as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output and video con-
version as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output and video con-
version as necessary.
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Analog”.)
Source:
Output will be according to the resolution level
which was set with Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for each Source
becomes possible.)
95
Advanced Setup—Continued
This section explains items on the “Speaker Setup”
menu.
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 61.
Speaker Configuration
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency,
distance, and level for each speaker.
You can choose which of the speakers you want to use
with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations, and
set the crossover frequencies, distances, and levels of the
front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back) use the same crossover frequencies,
distances, and levels for Speakers A and Speakers B.
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz, 150 Hz, or
200 Hz.
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
Speaker Setup
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
PLAYLIST
RANDOMREC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
SP A SP B
1, 5
1
2-4
1*
*TX-NR906 only
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
• TX-SR876 continue with step 2 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
2Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker Con-
fig”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Config” screen appears.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
SurrBack Ch
LPF of LFE
DoubleBass
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
120Hz
On
Speaker A
96
Advanced Setup—Continued
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Subwoofer”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Yes : Select if a subwoofer is con-
nected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
nected.
Note:
The same setting is used for Speakers A
and Speakers B.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Front”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a crossover fre-
quency.
Notes:
• This setting can be set independently
for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B.
• Fixed at “Full Band” if “Subwoofer”
(step 5) is set to “No”.
7Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Center”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a crossover fre-
quency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Can be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to “BTL” (page 61).
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”
(step 6) is set to anything other than
“Full Band”.
• For Speakers B, if any channel is set
to “Full Band”, “Center” is fixed at
“Full Band”.
8Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Surround”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-
over frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select “None”.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Can be set if the currently selected
speakers (Speakers A or Speakers B)
is set to “BTL” (page 61).
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”
(step 6) is set to anything other than
“Full Band”.
9Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-
over frequency.
If no surround back speakers are con-
nected, select “None”.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “Surround” is set to
“None” (step 8), or “Powered
Zone2” is being used (page 132).
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Sur-
round” (step 8) is set to anything
other than “Full Band”.
10 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack Ch”,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
Notes:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “SurrBack” is set to
“None” (step 9), or “Powered
Zone2” is being used (page 132).
Continue with step 11 on the next page.
97
Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
“80Hz(THX)”.
Double Bass
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
This setting can only be made if the “Subwoofer” setting
in step 4 is set to “Yes”, and the “Front” setting in step 5
is set to “Full Band”.
*
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
“Off(THX)”.
11 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “LPF of LFE”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a low-
pass filter frequency.
The following low-pass filter frequen-
cies can be selected: “80Hz(THX)”,
“90Hz”, “100Hz”, “110Hz”, or
“120Hz”.
Note:
The same setting is used for Speakers A
and Speakers B.
Continue with step 12 in the next col-
umn.
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
12 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “DoubleBass”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Off(THX):
The subwoofer only outputs the
LFE channel.
On:
In addition to LFE channel sounds,
the subwoofer outputs front left and
right channel bass sounds.
Note:
• The same setting is used for Speakers
A and Speakers B.
Continue with step 13 on the next page
(TX-NR906 only).
TX-SR876 continue with step 18 on
page 99.
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
98
Advanced Setup—Continued
Setting Speakers A and Speakers B
(TX-NR906 only)
If you’re using Speakers B, you can choose whether or
not to use the subwoofer, center, surround, and surround
back speakers with the Speakers A and Speakers B con-
figurations independently. You cannot choose whether
or not to use the front speakers.
Use the remote controller’s [SP A] or [SP B] button to
select Speakers A or Speakers B, respectively.
13 Press the Down [w] button to dis-
play the bottom half of the
“Speaker Config” screen.
Notes:
• The bottom half of the “Speaker
Config” screen can only be displayed
when the “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker B)” setting is set to
something other than “Not Use”
(page 61).
• You can switch between the Speak-
ers A and Speakers B settings on
either half of the “Speaker Config”
screen.
14 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Subwoofer”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the subwoofer with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the subwoofer with Speakers
A or Speakers B.
Note:
Cannot be set if “Subwoofer” (step 5) is
set to “No”.
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–2. Speaker Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
SurrBack
Not Use
Use
Not Use
Use
Use
Speaker A
15 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Center”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the center speaker with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Note:
Cannot be set if the “Center” (step 7) is
set to “None”.
16 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Surround”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the surround speakers
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surround speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Note:
Cannot be set if the “Center” (step 8) is
set to “None”.
17 Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to
use the surr back speakers
with Speakers A or Speakers
B.
Use: Select if you do want to use
the surr back speakers with
Speakers A or Speakers B.
Note:
• Fixed at “Not Use” if “Surround”
(step 16) is set to “Not Use”.
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker B)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
“SurrBack” is set to “None” (step 9),
or “Powered Zone2” is being used
(page 132).
99
Advanced Setup—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Speaker Distance
With the “Speaker Distance” settings, you can specify
the distance from each speaker to the listening position.
You can set the distances for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the
same distance settings for Speakers A and Speakers B.
18 Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1Measure and make a note of the
distance from each speaker to
the listening position.
2Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
Note:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
• TX-SR876 continue with step 3 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
PLAYLIST
RANDOMREC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
ZONE
2
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
SP A SP B
3, 9
2
2*
4-8
*TX-NR906 only
3Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Speaker Dis-
tance”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Distance” screen
appears.
Note:
Speakers that you set to “No” or
“None” in the Speaker Configuration
(page 95) cannot be selected.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Unit”, and then
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot
steps.
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.15 to 9 meters in
0.15-meter steps.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–3. Speaker Distance
Unit
Left
Center
Right
SurrRight
SurrBack R
SurrBack L
SurrLeft
Subwoofer
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
Speaker A
100
Advanced Setup—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Speaker Level Calibration
With the “Level Calibration” settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position. You can adjust the levels of front Speakers
A and front Speakers B independently. The other speak-
ers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back)
use the same level settings for Speakers A and Speakers
B.
Notes:
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of
the AV receiver is muted.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
7Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a speaker, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Notes:
• You can specify different distances
for front Speakers A and front
Speakers B, but not the other speak-
ers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround,
and surround back).
• The “Center” distance cannot be set
if the “Center” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98).
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” dis-
tances cannot be set if the “Sur-
round” is set to “None” (page 95) or
“Not Use” (page 98).
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”
distances cannot be set if “Speaker
Type: Front(Speaker A) or
Front(Speaker B)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
“SurrBack” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98), or
“Powered Zone2” is being used
(page 132).
• The “Subwoofer” distance cannot be
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”
(page 96).
8Repeat step 7 for each speaker.
9Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
remote controller’s [SP A] or
[SP B] button to select Speakers
A or Speakers B, respectively
(TX-NR906 only).
Notes:
• Speakers B cannot be selected if
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is
set to “Not Use”.
• TX-SR876 continue with step 2 after
press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button.
2Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
PLAYLIST
RANDOMREC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
ZONE
2
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
SP A SP B
2, 7
1
1*
3-6
*TX-NR906 only
101
Advanced Setup—Continued
Notes:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Level Calibra-
tion”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Level Calibration” screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
Note:
Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers
set to “No” or “None” in the Speaker
Configuration (page 95).
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–4. Level Calibration
Left
Center
Right
SurrRight
SurrBack R
SurrBack L
SurrLeft
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Speaker A
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a speaker, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
Notes:
• You can set different levels for front
Speakers A and front Speakers B, but
not the other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surr
back).
• The “Center” level cannot be set if
the “Center” is set to “None”
(page 95) or “Not Use” (page 98).
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” lev-
els cannot be set if the “Surround” is
set to “None” (page 95) or “Not Use”
(page 98).
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”
levels cannot be set if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker
B)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 61), “SurrBack” is set to
“None” (page 95) or “Not Use”
(page 98), or “Powered Zone2” is
being used (page 132).
• The “Subwoofer” levels cannot be
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”
(page 96).
6Repeat step 5 until the volume of
the test tone from each speaker
is the same.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.
7Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
102
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-
ume of each speaker can be set on page 100. The Equal-
izer settings only apply to Speakers A and cannot be
adjusted while Speakers B is selected.
■MultEQ XT
Audyssey MultEQ XT correction is active (see page 64).
■Dynamic EQ
“Audyssey MultEQ XT” and “Dynamic EQ” becomes
active (see page 64).
■Dynamic Vol(Light)
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
“Dynamic Volume (Light Compression Mode)”
becomes active (see page 64).
This setting prevents loud and soft sounds from being
much louder and softer respectively than average
sounds.
■Dynamic Vol(Heavy)
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
“Dynamic Volume (Heavy Compression Mode)”
becomes active.
This setting affects volume the most, causing all sounds
to be of equal loudness.
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “5. Equalizer Set-
tings”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Equalizer Settings” screen
appears.
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
REMOTE MODE
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
ZONE
2
+
-
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
1, 8
1
2-7
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–5. Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
4Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual: The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
MultEQ XT*1
Dynamic EQ*1
Dynamic Vol(Light)*1
Dynamic Vol(Heavy)*1
*1 These setting can be selected after having
performed the Automatic Speaker Setup.
As soon as the Automatic Speaker Setup is
complete, it will automatically be set to
Dynamic EQ™.
When “Dynamic EQ” is selected,
“MultEQ®XT” and “Dynamic EQ”
become available.
When “Dynamic Vol(Light)” or
“Dynamic Vol(Heavy)” is selected,
“MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and
“Dynamic Volume™” become avail-
able.
If you selected “Manual”, continue
with the next step. If you selected “Off”
go to step 8.
103
Advanced Setup—Continued
Notes:
• When the listening mode is set to Direct or Pure
Audio, no effect will be produced.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
5Use the Down [w] button to select
“Channel”, and then use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select a speaker.
You can select: “Front”, “Center”,
“Surround”, “SurrBack”, or “Sub-
woofer”.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a frequency, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to adjust the
level at that frequency.
You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”,
“400Hz”, “1000Hz”, “2500Hz”,
“6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. And for the
subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”,
“100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
The volume at each frequency can be
adjusted from –6 to +6 dB in 1 dB
steps.
Tip:
Low frequencies (e.g., 160Hz) affect
bass sounds; high frequencies (e.g.,
6300Hz) affect treble sounds.
7Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Channel”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select another
speaker.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
8Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–5. Equalizer Settings
Equalizer
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1000Hz
2500Hz
6300Hz
16000Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
104
Advanced Setup—Continued
THX Audio Setup
With the “SurrBack Sp Spacing” setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers. This
setting is used by Speakers A and Speakers B.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX
Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
You can also set the THX Loudness Plus feature “On” or
“Off”. When the “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expres-
sion at low volume.
This result is only available when the THX listening
mode is selected.
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. THX Audio
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “THX Audio Setup” screen appears.
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,
the “Preserve THX settings” can be
selected.
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 64).
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Config
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
MOVE VALUE
2–6. THX Audio Setup
SurrBack Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
Loudness Plus
Preserve THX Settings
> 4ft
Yes
Off
On
- - -
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “SurrBack Sp
Spacing”, and use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
round back speakers:
> 4ft (>1.2m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are more
than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.
< 1ft (< 0.3m): Select this if your sur-
round back speakers are between 0 and
1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1ft– 4ft (0.3m–1.2m): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
Note:
Cannot be set if “SurrBack Ch” is set to
“2ch” (page 96), “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A) or Front(Speaker B)”
is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 61),
“SurrBack” is set to “None” (page 96)
or “Not Use” (page 98), or “Powered
Zone2” is being used (page 132).
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “THX Subwoofer”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
Ye s: Select this if you have a THX-
certified subwoofer.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “BGC”, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
This setting is only available if “THX
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (step 5).
105
Advanced Setup—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Here you can set listening mode-related settings and
functions.
7Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Loudness Plus”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off Loud-
ness Plus.
On: Select this to turn on Loud-
ness Plus (default).
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,
the “Preserve THX settings” selection
will appear under “Loudness Plus”
(Step 8).
8Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Preserve THX set-
tings”, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Ye s: When Yes is selected,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ /
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
™ will not be active.
No: When No is selected,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ /
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
will be active in THX listen-
ing mode depending on the
setting.
Note:
This setting is only available if “Loud-
ness Plus” is set to “Off” (step 7).
9Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control tech-
nology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loud-
ness Plus, home theater audiences can now experi-
ence the rich details in a surround mix at any volume
level. A consequence of turning the volume below
Reference Level is that certain sound elements can
be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by
intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel
levels and frequency response. This enables users to
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is auto-
matically applied when listening in any THX listen-
ing mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and
THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper
THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of con-
tent.
Audio Adjust
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Audio Adjust”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Audio Adjust” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The function menu you selected
appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
The settings are explained below.
3. Audio Adjust
1. Tone Control
2. DSD
3. Multiplex/Mono
4. PLIIx/Neo:6
5. Dolby EX
6. Theater-Dimensional
7. LFE Level
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
106
Advanced Setup—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surr back speakers individually.
For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Notes:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the
Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening mode is selected.
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [TONE], [e], and [r] buttons
(see page 72).
DSD Setting
■DAC Direct
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Pure Audio or Direct lis-
tening mode is selected.
No: DSD signals are processed by the DSP
(default).
Yes : DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex
■Input Ch(Mux)
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub:
Both the main and sub channels are output.
Mono
■Input Ch(Mono)
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or
2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening
mode.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
(default).
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
PLIIx Music(2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
■Panorama
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
5When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
107
Advanced Setup—Continued
■Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Lower settings move the sound field
forward. Higher settings move it backward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■Center Width
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Neo:6 Music
■Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 2.
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
Dolby EX Settings
■Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-
dled.
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode (default).
Manual: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
Theater-Dimensional (T–D) Setting
■Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-
distant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees
(default).
Narrow: Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞dB.
■Dolby Digital
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital and
Dolby Digital Plus sources.
■DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS and DTS-HD
High Resolution sources.
■Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
■Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
■DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
30˚
Front left speaker Front right speaker
108
Advanced Setup—Continued
]
You can change various audio settings by pressing the
[DIRECT] button.
Music Optimizer
Optimizer
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound qual-
ity of compressed music files. Use it with music files that
use “lossy” compression, such as MP3.
Note:
The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM
digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below
48 kHz and analog audio input signals. The Music Opti-
mizer is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listen-
ing mode is selected.
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, Neural THX,
and Multichannel.
Adjust Using the Direct Button
1
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button , press and hold
down the [DIRECT] button.
The setting item appears on the display.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
SETUP
DIRECT
RECEIVER
L NIGHT
Re-EQ
ENTER
3Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change the setting.
Repeat this step for the other settings.
Off: Music Optimizer off (default).
On: Music Optimizer on.
Using the Re-EQ Function
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
109
Advanced Setup—Continued
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to “Auto”.
This section explains items on the “Source Setup” menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Using the Late Night Function
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic
range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
Auto: The dynamic range is con-
trolled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
(default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Source Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, and then use the
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
2Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Source Setup” menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
4. Source Setup
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
4. Picture Adjust
5. Satellite Radio
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
DVD
110
Advanced Setup—Continued
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [e] button to reduce its input level. If it’s notice-
ably quieter, use the Right [r] button to increase its
input level. The input level can be adjusted from –12 dB
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
A/V Sync
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the “A/V Sync” setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
Use the Up and Down
[q]/[w] buttons to
select an input selector,
and use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons
to set the delay.
To view the TV picture
while setting the delay,
press [ENTER].
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 118), and your TV
or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay
time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip
Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.
Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
The custom name is edited using the character input
screen.
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a
character, and then press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
2. When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure to
use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select
“OK”, and then press [ENTER]. Otherwise it will
not be saved.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select
“ ”(Left) or “ ”(Right) and then press [ENTER].
2. Press [ENTER] several times to select the incorrect
character (The cursor moves one letter each time
[ENTER] is pressed).
3. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select the
correct character, and then press [ENTER].
Notes:
• To name a radio preset, use the [TUNER] button to
select AM or FM, and then select the preset (see step
1 on page 109).
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
• To restore a custom name to the default, erase the cus-
tom name by entering an empty white space for each
letter.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
The “Source Setup” menu items are
explained below.
6When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
DVD
Press Enter to see picture.
4–2. A/V Sync
A/V Sync 100msec
VALUE
Name input area
(Left)/ (Right):
Selected when the cursor is moved within
the Name input area.
OK:
Selects when the entry is complete.
CANCEL:
Selects when you want to cancel the name
entry.
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4-3. Name Edit
Name
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
INPUT
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4-3. Name Edit
Name
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . '
( ) + * = / , : ; ! ? _
OK
CANCEL
INPUT
ENTER
DISPLAY
111
Advanced Setup—Continued
Picture Adjust
The new “4-4. Picture Adjust” item has been added to
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The
settings are explained below.
■Game Mode
If video signal delay occurs during play on a video com-
ponent, such as a Game console, connected to the AV
receiver, select “Game Mode” on the input selector con-
nected to the component and set it to “On”.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select:
Off: Game Mode off (default).
On: Game Mode on.
■Zoom Mode
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
Normal:
Full: (default)
Zoom:
WideZoom:
Note:
The “Zoom Mode” can also be set using the [DISPLAY]
button on the remote controller.
1. Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button until the set-
ting item appears on the display.
2. Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select
“Zoom Mode”, and use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change the setting.
■ISF Mode
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and
calibration standards established by the Imaging Science
Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully
crafted, industry-recognized standards for optimal video
performance and has implemented a training program
for technicians and installers to use these standards to
obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accord-
ingly, Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration be
performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.
Note:
When “ISF Mode” is selected, the setting from “Resolu-
tion” to “B Contrast” is changed.
Custom: User setting (All items can be freely set.)
Day: Setting when a room is bright.
Night: Setting when a room is dark.
112
Advanced Setup—Continued
Resolution
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-
puts and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture res-
olution as necessary to match the resolution supported
by your TV.
Available only when Source has been selected under the
“1-1. Monitor Out” setting.
Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
Contrast
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Hue
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–20” is the strongest green.
“+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation
With this setting you can adjust saturation.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the weakest color.
“+50” is the strongest color.
Picture Mode
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver automati-
cally detects the type of content and processes it accord-
ingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film
manually.
Auto: The type of content is detected automati-
cally and processed accordingly (default).
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from video.
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc
whose content originates from film.
Edge Enhancement
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture
appear sharper.
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).
Low: Low edge enhancement.
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.
High: High edge enhancement.
Mosquito NR
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue
with overly compressed MPEG content.
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High: High mosquito noise reduction.
Random NR
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indis-
criminate picture noise, such as film grain.
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low random noise reduction.
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.
High: High random noise reduction.
Block NR
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG
content.
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.
Gamma
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G
(green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color
data signal.
Can be adjusted from –3 to +3 in steps of 1 (default is 0).
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV
receiver at the same resolution and with no
conversion (default).
Auto: Select this to have the AV receiver automat-
ically convert video at resolutions not sup-
ported by your TV.
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
it will operate as “Through”.
480p (480/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output and
video conversion as necessary.
720p: Select this for 720p output and video con-
version as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output and video con-
version as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output and video con-
version as necessary.
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
it will operate as “
1080i
”.
Source:
Output will be according to the resolution level
which was set with Resolution inside Source:
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for each Source
becomes possible.)
113
Advanced Setup—Continued
R Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
R Contrast:
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
G Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
GContrast:
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
B Brightness:
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-
ness.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the darkest.
“+50” is the brightest.
B Contrast:
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is
0).
“–50” is the least.
“+50” is the greatest.
Satellite Radio
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if “Satellite Radio” is set to None (see page 118). See the
separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if “Satellite Radio” is set to None or XM (see
page 118). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for
more information.
114
Advanced Setup—Continued
On the “Listening Mode Preset” menu, you can specify
a default listening mode for each of the audio formats
supported by each input selector. The AV receiver will
then select the listening mode automatically depending
on the format of the input signal. You can still select the
other listening modes, although the default listening
mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV
receiver.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Listening Mode Presets
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “5. Listening Mode
Preset”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu
appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and then press [ENTER].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [w] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
For the “TUNER” input selector, “Ana-
log” is the only format available.
5. Listening Mode Preset
1. DVD
2. VCR/DVR
3. CBL/SAT
4. GAME/TV
5. AUX1
6. AUX2
7. TAPE
8. TUNER
9. CD
10. PHONO
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
5–x. Listening Mode Preset
DVD
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F. 2ch
D.F. Mono
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
5–x. Listening Mode Preset
DVD
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an audio format,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a listen-
ing mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 82).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital and
Dolby Digital plus sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS and DTS-HD High Res-
olution sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio.
192k/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio. (input via HDMI)
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
DSD: Specifies the default listening
mode for DSD multichannel sources,
such as SACD (input via HDMI).
5When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
115
Advanced Setup—Continued
This section explains items on the “Miscellaneous”
menu.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Volume Setup
■Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Absolute: Display range is “Min”, 0.5 through 99.5,
“Max”.
Relative: Display range is –∞dB, –81.5 dB through
+18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0dB.
■Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 71). It can be
set to –∞dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
■Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
Miscellaneous Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
PLAYLIST
RANDOMREC
ENTER
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
SP A SP B
1, 5
1
2-4
1*
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
The items are explained below.
5When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
116
Advanced Setup—Continued
■Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
Note:
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
■Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
■Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
■Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –∞dB, –81 dB to
+18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
OSD Setup
■Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not
be output if the input source is connected to a COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
“Immediate Display” be turned off.
■Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3.
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9 (default).
■Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
details are displayed.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
■TV Format (not North American models)
See “TV Format Setup (not North American models)”
on page 62.
■Language
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
117
Advanced Setup—Continued
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Remote Control
■Remote ID
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
Note:
If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote
controller.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
Zone2/Zone3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 130.
Hardware Setup
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SETUP
RECEIVER
INPUT
ENTER
Number
buttons
Remote
indicator
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change it.
The items are explained below.
5When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
1While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
2Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
118
Advanced Setup—Continued
Tuner
■AM Freq Step (on some models)
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on
page 63.
■Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold
separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respec-
tively. If you connect both types of antenna, select
XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None. See the separate
Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
Analog Multich
■Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH: SUBWOOFER jack.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
HDMI
■Audio TV Out
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may
want to change this setting to “On” if your TV is con-
nected to an HDMI output and you want to listen to
audio from an HDMI component through your TV’s
speakers. Normally, it should be set to “Off”.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
Notes:
• If “On” is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When “TV Control” is enabled, this setting is set to
“Auto”.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if “On” is selected.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, or
“TV Control” is set to “Enable” and you’re listening
through your TV’s speakers (see page 43), if you turn
up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be
output by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
■Lip Sync
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled (default).
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the “A/V Sync”
screen (see page 110).
■x.v.Color
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the “x.v.Color”, you can enable “x.v.Color” on
the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: “x.v.Color” disabled (default).
Enable: “x.v.Color” enabled.
Notes:
• If the color is unnatural when “x.v.Color” is set to
“Enable”, change the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
■Control
This function allows -compatible components
connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV
receiver.
Notes:
• , which stands for Remote Interactive over
HDMI, is the name of the system control function
found on Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be
used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control),
which allows system control over HDMI and is part of
the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability
between various components, however, operation with
components other than -compatible compo-
nents cannot be guaranteed.
•Set to “Disable” when a connected piece of equipment
is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equip-
ment is compatible or not.
• If movement is unnatural when set to “Enable”, change
the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
Disable: disabled (default).
Enable: enabled.
119
Advanced Setup—Continued
Power Control
To link the power functions of -compatible
components connected via HDMI, select “Enable”.
Notes:
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the
above “Control” setting is set to “Enable”.
• HDMI power control only works with -com-
patible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to “Enable”, power consumption will
increase.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
TV Control
Set to “Enable” when you want to control the AV
receiver from an -compatible TV that is con-
nected to HDMI.
Notes:
•Set to “Disable” when the TV is not compatible or
when it is unclear whether the TV is compatible or
not.
• The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the
above “Control” and “Power Control” settings are both
set to “Enable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-
ual for details.
Network
See “Network Settings” on page 128.
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked (default).
When Locked is selected, only this “Lock Setup” item
can be accessed.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Note:
After changing the settings of the “Control”, “Power
Control”, or “TV Control”, turn off the power to all
connected pieces of equipment and then turn on
again. Refer to the User’s Manuals for all connected
pieces of equipment.
When linking to a TV that conforms to the CEC
standard, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to
“HDMI Main”.
Lock Setup
120
Advanced Setup—Continued
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you
want to use to listen to that component.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
Selecting Audio Inputs
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select an audio
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
HDMI:
Selects the assigned HDMI IN, and
the HDMI indicator appears on the
display. (The HDMI IN must
already be assigned to the current
input selector. See page 56.)
Auto:
Selects the assigned COAXIAL or
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN, and the
DIGITAL indicator appears on the
display. (The DIGITAL IN must
already be assigned to the current
input selector. See page 59.) If there
is no digital signal, the analog input
is used instead.
Multich:
Selects the multichannel input, and
the ANALOG indicator appears on
the display. (The multichannel input
must already be assigned to the cur-
rent input selector. See page 60.)
Analog:
Selects the analog input, and the
ANALOG indicator appears on the
display.
LISTENING MODE
RC-
687
M
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
Re-EQ
SP A SP B
AUDIO SEL
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select “Auto”.
2While “Auto” is shown on the
display, use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input
signals will be heard. If the input
signal is not PCM, the PCM indica-
tor will flash and noise may also be
produced.
DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) for-
mat input signals will be heard. If
the input signal is not DTS, the
DTS indicator will flash and there
will be no sound.
Auto (default):
The format is detected automati-
cally. If no digital input signal is
present, the analog input is used
instead.
12
121
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
NET/USB can also be used to play music files stored on
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV
receiver’s front panel USB port.
Internet Radio
With Internet radio you can:
• Corresponds to M3U, PLS and Podcast playlists and
the streaming of the corresponding audio format noted
below.
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver
from your computer and select stations in your Web
browser.
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.
■vTuner Internet Radio
• This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Ser-
vice at no additional charge. Once you have connected
your unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet
Radio to search for and play Internet radio stations and
podcasts at any time. To enhance your Internet radio
experience, the http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal is
available to you as an easy way to browse to find sta-
tions, set up/organize your favorites, add your own
stations, get help, etc. After the first time you try Inter-
net radio/vTuner on your unit you can use the MAC
Address of your unit to create a member login account
(email address and password) on the
http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC
Address, please see Network Settings (page 128).
Supported Audio File Formats
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:
MP3, WMA, WAV, and AAC. It also supports
Microsoft’s PlaysForSure technology.
■MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz
and a bit-rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
■WMA
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpo-
ration. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
Windows Media® Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
played.
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
■WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
■AAC
AAC stands for MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 16 and 320 kbps, are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename
extension.
About NET/USB
122
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music
files in the first partition can be played.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
Server Requirements
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• UPnP AV-compatible media server
• DLNA-compatible media server
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Connect 2.0
can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-
puts when playing music files.
Network Requirements
■Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.
■Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-
ing IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-
taneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
mended.
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
■Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Notes:
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 128.
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV receiver (see page 128).
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Profes-
sional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update
Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP
Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Processor: 233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
Memory: 64 MB
Hard disk: 200 MB of free space
Drive: CD or DVD drive
Modem: 28.8 kbps
Sound card: 16-bit sound card
Monitor: Super VGA (800 x 600)
Video card: 64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Software: Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
123
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into
a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
This section explains how to play music files on a com-
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See
page 121 for details on supported music servers and
music file formats.
Connecting the AV Receiver
ETHERNET
TX-NR906
Internet
radio
Modem
Router
Computer or media server
LAN/Ethernet port
WAN port
LAN port
LAN port
Playing Music Files on a Server
1Start your computer or media
server.
2Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button to select the
Server screen.
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the server. It flashes if a
connection cannot be established.
3Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a server, and then
press [ENTER].
A list of items on the server appears.
5Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and then
press [ENTER].
A list of music files appears.
NET/USB
REFRESH
1 / 5
USB/iRADIO
RETURN
Server
Server1: Shared1
server: MYPC
NET/USB
REFRESH
1 / 10
USB/iRADIO
RETURN
Server1: Shared1
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
Genre
Year
Rating
All Music
Song 1
NET/USB
RETURN
RETURN
1 / 11
USB/iRADIO
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
124
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the current server are
played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Note:
If the message “No item” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV receiver connec-
tions.
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
Note:
Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.
6
or
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a music file, and press
the [ENTER] or Play [1] button
to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [2]
button.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
RETURN
RETURN
My favorite Album
My favorite Album
1 / 11
Artist name
My favorite song 1
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
1Start Windows Media Player 11.
2On the Library menu, select Media Shar-
ing.
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
3Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
A list of devices that support PlaysForSure
appears.
4Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
5Click OK to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Win-
dows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver (see page 123).
125
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device. See page 121 for details on sup-
ported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
1Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
2Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the USB screen.
The USB indicator lights up if the AV
receiver is able to read the USB mass
storage device. It flashes if it cannot
read it.
3Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
INPUT SELECTOR
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
AUX
1
AUX
2
G
AME
/
TV
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
NET/USB
RECEIVER
ENTER
NET/USB
REFRESH
RETURN
1 / 1
USB
USB Storage
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a USB mass stor-
age device, and then press
[ENTER].
A list of the device’s contents appears.
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
[q]/[w] buttons to select it, and then
press [ENTER].
5
or
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [RETURN] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [2] or Pause [3] button, respec-
tively.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
USB Storage
Folder1
Folder2
01_Song_Track1
02_Song_Track2
03_Song_Track3
04_Song_Track4
05_Song_Track5
06_Song_Track6
07_Song_Track7
08_Song_Track8
NET/USB
RETURNiRADIO/SERVER
RETURN
2 / 5
00:10
01:12:34
Folder1
Album
Artist
02_Song_Track2
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
RETURN
RETURN
1/17
126
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
Random Playback
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are
not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat, All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat mode, all of the songs in the current folder are
played repeatedly.
In All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its
AC adapter to power it.
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-
puters without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and iPods containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.
127
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
receiver to a network with Internet access (see
page 123).
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by con-
necting to the AV receiver from your computer and
selecting stations in your Web browser.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
Listening to Internet Radio
1Press the [NET/USB] INPUT
SELECTOR button repeatedly to
select the Internet Radio screen.
The NETWORK indicator lights up if
the AV receiver is able to establish a
connection to the network. It flashes if
a connection cannot be established.
When the program setting is finished,
go to Procedure 5.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SETUP
NET/USB
RECEIVER
ENTER
NET/USB
REFRESH
RETURN
URL
SETUP
Internet Radio
1.vTuner Internet Radio
2.---
3.---
4.---
5.---
6.---
7.---
8.---
9.---
10.---
2Press the [NET/USB] REMOTE
MODE button to select the
NET/USB remote controller
mode.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an empty item, and
then press the [SETUP] button.
The URL Input screen appears.
4Use the remote controller to
enter the URL of the Internet
radio station you want to listen
to.
Use the same method as for the “Name
Edit” function on page 110 to enter a
URL.
When you’ve finished, select
“OK”, and then press [ENTER].
The station appears in the list.
To update the station list, press
the [RETURN] button.
OR:
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
The browser connects to the AV
receiver and displays the same screen
as the AV receiver.
Select the Internet radio station
with your browser.
Notes:
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the “Network” screen (see
page 128).
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the AV
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s
IP address on “Network” screen.
128
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [ENTER] to
start playback.
Notes:
• When you try the connection after the user preset, if
“[?]” is displayed in the list, URL may be entered
incorrectly. Check the URL again.
• Even if the entered URL is improper (not the applica-
ble playlist format), some contents may be displayed.
In that case, [?] is displayed.
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator
lights up.
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable
modem, xDSL modem, etc).
Note:
When modifying network settings, after modifying it is
necessary to execute Save Settings.
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices
to automatically configure themselves on a network.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
5Press [ENTER].
The station’s programs are displayed.
6Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select a program, and
then press [ENTER].
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
Refer to page 121 for the Internet
Radio.
RETURN
RETURN
PLAY
iRadio station name
1 / 11
- - -
Streaming program name
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
Network Settings
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1. Remote Control
2. Zone2/Zone3
3. Tuner
4. Analog Multich
5. HDMI
6. Network
MOVE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
129
NET/USB (TX-NR906 only)—Continued
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Mac Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
■Port
This is the network port used for control over the net-
work.
DHCP
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS
Server” settings yourself.
IP Address
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided
by your ISP.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
Subnet Mask
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
Gateway
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
DNS Server
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “6. Network”, and
then press [ENTER].
The “Network” screen appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select the settings, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
To enter an IP address, select the set-
ting, and then press [ENTER]. The
arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons can
then be used to enter numbers. Press
[ENTER] again to set the number.
The settings are explained on the next
page.
5When you’ve finished, press the
Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “ Save Settings”, and
then press [ENTER].
Setup closes.
When modifying network settings,
after modifying it is necessary to exe-
cute “ Save Settings”.
6When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
7-6. Network
MAC Address
Control
Port
xx : xx : xx : xx : xx : xx
Enable
xxxxx
MOVE VALUE INPUT RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
7-6. Network
Proxy
Proxy URL
Proxy Port
Save Settings
Disable
8080
MOVE VALUE ENTER RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
130
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV r e c e iver .
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 2 amp.
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set
on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver (see
page 133).
Connecting Zone 2
To use this setup, you must set the “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker B)” setting to “Not Use” (see
page 61), and set the “Powered Zone 2” setting to
“Act” (see page 132).
LR
Main room
TV
Zone 2
AV receiver
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
PRE OUT
L
R
RL
IN
Main room
Zone 2
TV
Receiver/
integrated amp
AV receiver
131
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2 Video Output
The AV receiver features a composite video output for
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both
audio and video in that zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Note:
The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and S-Video
inputs.
Zone 2 12V Trigger
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes high (+12 volts, 100 mil-
liamperes max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo-
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-
nals on your Zone 3 amp.
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set
on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver (see
page 133).
ZONE 2
OUT
Main room
TV
Zone 2
AV receiver
TV
Connecting Zone 3
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
PRE OUT
L
R
RL
IN
Main room
Zone 3
TV
Receiver/
integrated amp
AV receiver
132
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 130, you
must set the “Powered Zone2” setting to “Act” (Acti-
vated).
Notes:
• When “Act” is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the
Zone 2 speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R
speaker terminals output sound, but the surround back
speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker
terminals do not. When “Act” is selected and Zone 2
turned off, the surround back speakers output sound as
normal.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Powered Zone2 Setting
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
REC
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
SP A SP B
SETUP
RECEIVER
ENTER
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Zone2/Zone3”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Zone2/Zone3” screen appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Powered Zone2”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Not Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
7-2. Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
133
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” or
“Zone3 Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that
you can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the
AV r e c eiver .
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
1Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
3Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. Zone2/Zone3”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “Zone2/Zone3” screen appears.
4Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Zone2 Out” or
“Zone3 Out”, and use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
Fixed:
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume must
be set on the amp in that zone.
Variable:
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can
be set on the AV receiver.
7-2. Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
MOVE VALUE RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
SETUP
5Press the [SETUP] button.
Setup closes.
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
TONE
OFF
,
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
ZONE3
ZONE2
MUTING
ON
STANDBY
LEVEL–,
LEVEL+
INPUT
SELECTOR
134
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selec-
tor button repeatedly. On the North American model,
you can also select XM or SIRIUS.
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2
PRE OUT, ZONE 3 PRE OUT and ZONE 2 L/R
speaker terminals. Digital input sources are not out-
put. If no sound is heard when an input source is
selected, check if it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema) are unavail-
able.
• When Zone2 is on, Pure Audio cannot be selected.
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes high (+12 volts).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.
Turning Off Zones
Note:
When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes low (0 volts).
1
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes, and the input selector currently
selected for the zone appears on the dis-
play.
2
Remote
controller
or
AV receiver
On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly.
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selec-
tor appears on the display, and the
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
continuously.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
+10
123
456
789
0
NET/USB
1
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
2
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[OFF] button.
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
135
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Note:
Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
Muting Zones
Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones
Notes:
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the “Zone2
Out” setting is set to “Fixed” (page 133).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the “Zone3 Out” set-
ting is set to “Fixed” (page 133).
1
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
2
Remote
controller
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] but-
ton.
On the AV receiver, press Up [r]
and Down [e] button.
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE2] or [ZONE3] REMOTE
MODE button, and then press the
[MUTING] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE2] or
[ZONE3] REMOTE MODE button,
and then press the [MUTING] but-
ton again.
1
AV receiver
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
2Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select
“Bass” “Treble” or “Balance”.
3Use the Up [r] and Down [e]
buttons to adjust the Bass, Tre-
ble or Balance.
• You can boost or cut the Bass or Tre-
ble from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB
steps.
• You can adjust the balance from 0 in
the center to +10 dB to the right or
+10 dB to the left in 2 dB steps.
136
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
IR IN
Connecting
block
Remote controller
IR Receiver
Main room Zone 2/3
Signal flow
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
AV receiver
IR IN
Connecting
block
Remote controller
IR Receiver
Inside
cabinet
Signal flow
IR IN
IR OUT
Connecting
block
IR Receiver
Remote controller
Signal flow
IR Emitter
Other component
AV receiver
IR IN
OUT
Remote control
sensor
Other component
Emitter
IR Emitter
Signal flow
Miniplug
Miniplug cable
AV receiver
137
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 140).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 141).
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component
that you want to control.
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[RECEIVER], [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3], and
[NET/USB] REMOTE MODE buttons.
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
Entering Remote Control Codes
1Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
REMOTE
MODE
TV
RECEIVER
STANDBY
I
Number
buttons
Remote
indicator
2While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
3Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
4Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote con-
troller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
CD
TUNER
TAPE
0
123
456
789
NET/USB
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder,
MD recorder or Onkyo RI Dock, enter the appro-
priate remote control code to the [CD] REMOTE
MODE button.
138
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via u
Onkyo components that are connected via u are con-
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use
the following remote control codes:
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5001: Onkyo DVD player without u (default)
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6001: Onkyo CD player without u (default)
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without u
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without u
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo RI Dock without u
Note:
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u
to work properly, you must set the Input Display accord-
ingly (see page 63).
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
1Make sure the Onkyo component is con-
nected with an u cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 50 for details.
2Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the REMOTE MODE button.
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button
5002: Onkyo DVD player with u
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
6002: Onkyo CD player with u
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with u
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with u
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo RI Dock with u
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
3Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.
1While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button that you want to
reset, press the TV [9] button.
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
2Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
with remote control codes for control-
ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-
ers, respectively. When these buttons
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
restored.
Resetting the Remote Controller
1While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
2Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
139
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.) With some components, certain but-
tons may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■Controlling a TV
a[ON], [STANDBY], TV
[9]*
Set the TV to On or Standby.
bNumber buttons
Enter numbers.
c[CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*
Select channels on the TV.
d[PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.
e[TV INPUT]*
Selects the TV’s external
inputs.
fTV VOL [q]/[w]*
Adjust the TV’s volume.
g[MUTING]
Mutes the TV.
h[q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the TV.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk
(*) are exclusively for controlling a
TV and can be used at any time,
regardless of the currently selected
remote controller mode.
■Controlling a VCR
a[ON], [STANDBY]
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
bNumber buttons
Enter numbers.
c[CLEAR]
Cancels functions.
d[CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
e[PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.
fREC [y]
Starts recording.
gEject [0]
Ejects the videocassette.
h[1], [3], [2], [5], [4]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
i[q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the VCR.
■Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
a[ON], [STANDBY]
Set the satellite/cable receiver
to On or Standby.
bNumber buttons
Enter numbers.
c[CLEAR]
Cancels functions.
d[CH +/–]
Selects satellite/cable chan-
nels.
e[PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel.
f[GUIDE]
Displays the program guide.
g[5], [4]
Fast Reverse and Fast forward.
h[q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[MENU]/
[ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the satel-
lite/cable receiver.
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
1
8
3
4
5
3
6
8
8
7
2
8
Press [TV] first
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
2
9
9
3
9
8
1
9
4
5
6
7
Press [VCR] first
INPUT SELECTOR
LISTENING MODE
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
RC-
687
M
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
REPEAT
PLAY MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
VIDEO OFFOPEN/CLOSE
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
PLAYLIST
RANDOM
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
VCRVCR DVDDVD HDDHDD
REC
ENTER
TEST TONE
AUDIO SEL
CH SEL
SURR
DIRECT
THX
PURE A
STEREO
LEVEL
+
LEVEL
-
L NIGHT
ALL ST
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
Re-EQ
NET/USB
SP A SP B
1
2
8
8
3
6
8
4
5
8
7
Press [CABLE] (SAT) first
140
Controlling Other Components—Continued
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[1] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 137) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV CH
[+]/[–], Re-EQ, LIGHT.
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [STANDBY] button to
learn the command. In the TV remote control mode,
the remote controller’s [STANDBY] and TV [9]
buttons are linked, so using the [STANDBY] button to
learn the command will mean that you can also use the
TV [9] button to turn your TV on or off in TV
remote control mode.
• When you want to learn the commands from your
TV’s Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV
remote control mode and use the remote controller’s
CH [+/–] button (left to the [ENTER] button) to learn
the commands. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] but-
tons are linked, so using the CH [+/–] button to learn
these commands will mean that you can also use the
TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV
remote control mode.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 138).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
Learning Commands
1While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press the [ON] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
2Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
3Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DISPLAY MUTING
G
U
I
D
E
E
X
I
T
PREV
CH
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
-
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
S
E
T
U
P
R
E
T
U
R
N
NET/USB
1, 4
1
Remote
indicator
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
4To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished.
POWER SLEEP DIMMER SUR
MODE
VIDEO-1 VIDEO-2
TAPE
DVD C D
C D DVD
TUNER
TUNER
PHONO
INPUT SELECTOR
DISC
TAPE
VOLUME
LEVEL
CH SEL
PRESET
MUTING
TEST
TONE
MULTI-CH
INPUT
GROUP
R
10
--/--- 1112
REMOTE MODE
ZONE2
DVD
VCR CD
ZONE3
RECEIVER
CABLE
NET/USB
TAPE/AMP
SAT
CDR/MD/DOCK
+
-
T
V CH
T
V VOL
SLEEP
INPUT SELECTOR
3
2
MACRO
1
+
10 0
CLEAR
D.TUN
123
456
789
INPUT
I
ONSTANDBYT
V
TAPE
DVD
DCR/DVRCBL/SAT
AUX1
AUX2
TUNER
NET/USB
CD
PHONO
GAME/TV
About 2 to 6
inches (5–15 cm)
Supplied
remote controller
(RC-687M)
141
Controlling Other Components—Continued
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to
select the CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
the CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [1] button to start playback on
the CD player.
You can program a MACRO button so that all five
actions are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.
Note:
If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are taught
new commands, the macro will no longer work properly
and will have to be made again.
Running Macros
Deleting Macros
Using Macros
1While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote con-
troller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
INPUT SELECTOR
ON STANDBY
DIMMER
CDR/MD/DOCK
SAT
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
MACRO
REMOTE MODE
--
/
---
10 11 12
TV
TV CH
TV VOL
DVD
AUX1AUX
2
GAME/TV
CBL/SATVCR/DVR
D. TUN
CD
TUNER
TAPE
PHONO
ENTER
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
M
E
N
U
VOL
CH
DISC
ALBUM
TV
VCR
CABLE
NET/USB
DVD
RECEIVER
CD
+
-
123
ZONE
3
ZONE
2
INPUT
+
+10 0
CLEAR
123
456
789
NET/USB
RECEIVER
REMOTE
MODE
MACRO
1, 2, 3
Remote
indicator
2Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
REMOTE MODE, Play [1].
3When you’ve finished, press the
MACRO button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
cess will finish automatically.
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
1While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
ton, press the MACRO button
whose macro you want to delete.
2Press the MACRO button again.
142
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into
the wall outlet.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact your Onkyo dealer.
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that the digital input source is selected
properly (page 59).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 120).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 23).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume. It can be set to −∞ dB, −81.5 dB
through +18.0 dB (page 70). The AV receiver is
designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide
volume range, allowing precise adjustment.
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 71).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers
(page 72).
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-
nected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 46).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 95–102).
• The input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to
“Auto” (page 120).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a supported audio format.
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“L/R” (page 106).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 95).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listen-
ing mode with a mono source, such as an AM radio
station or mono TV program, the sound is concen-
trated in the center speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“C” (page 106).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 95).
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 81).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“L/R” (page 106).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
Power
Audio
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo
dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [ON/STANDBY] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
VCR/DVR
143
Troubleshooting—Continued
The surround back speakers produce no sound
•
The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
tening modes. Select another listening mode (page 81).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
•
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 95).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 130).
The subwoofer produces no sound
• When you play source material that contains no infor-
mation in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces
no sound.
•
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 95).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
• Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speaker Type:
Front(Speaker A)” is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”, or
“Speaker Type: Front(Speaker B)” is set to “Normal”,
“Bi-Amp”, or “BTL” (page 61).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the [AUDIO] button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected (pages 82-86).
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 130).
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2 is on.
The volume cannot be set as required (The vol-
ume cannot be set to +18.0 dB)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 115).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 71 and 100), the maximum vol-
ume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD (page 109).
The DVD analog multichannel input doesn’t
work
• Check the DVD multichannel input connections
(page 120).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 60).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 80).
• Make sure that the “Speaker Type” is not set to
“Bi-Amp”. The multichannel DVD input cannot be
used if “Speaker Type” is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 61).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
About DTS signals
•
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening
mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to pre-
vent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or fast
reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, because the AV receiver does
not switch formats immediately, you may not hear any
sound, in which case you should stop your player for
about three seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
nals, sound may not be output immediately.
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 33).
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-
nected (pages 36-49).
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output.
Video
144
Troubleshooting—Continued
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub” (page 52), and select “- - -” in the “Video Input
Setup” on page 56 to watch composite video, S-Video,
and component video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to
“Analog” (page 52), and select “- - -” in the “Compo-
nent Video Setup” on page 58 to watch composite
video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 58), and your TV must be connected to either
the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
TOR OUT (pages 36 and 42).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 56), and your TV must be connected to the
HDMI OUT (page 42).
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”,
and the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other
than “Through” (see page 55), no video is output by
the HDMI OUT.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• If your TV is connected to the analog outputs, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “Analog” (page 52).
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
•
On non-North American models, specify the TV system
used in your area in the “TV Format Setup
(not North American models)” on page 62.
The immediate display does not appear
• The immediate display will not appear when the input
signal from the COMPONENT VIDEO IN is output to
a device connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT.
• Depending on the input signal, the immediate display
may not appear when the input signal from the HDMI
IN is output to a device connected to the HDMI OUT.
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
appear
• Relocate your antenna.
•
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 73).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-
rect polarity (page 15).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor (page 15).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 137).
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of bat-
teries, or old and new batteries (page 15).
• Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.
•
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
reliably when the doors are closed.
• When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
not work as expected.
• Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver
and remote controller (page 117).
Can’t control other components
• If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an u cable won’t work (page 50).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (page 16).
• If you’ve connected an u-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, u Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or an u Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for the
remote controller to work properly, you must set the
display to MD, CDR, or DOCK (page 63).
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code (page 137).
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 140).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 138).
Tuner
Remote Controller
145
Troubleshooting—Continued
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via u, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 137).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
• When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
video recording is not possible because no video sig-
nals are output. Select another listening mode.
There’s no sound
• Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver (page 122).
• Check the “Network Settings” (page 128).
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver (page 122).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-
worked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
• If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
• Check the Network settings (page 128).
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
back may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
Recording
Zone 2/Zone 3
Music Server and Internet Radio
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
146
Troubleshooting—Continued
The sound changes when I connect my head-
phones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
The speaker volume cannot be set as required
• When the Automatic Speaker Setup function is used,
or the volume is adjusted on the onscreen setup
menus, the maximum possible volume setting may
change.
The speaker distance cannot be set as required
• In some cases, corrected values suitable for home the-
ater use may be set automatically.
The display doesn’t work
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-
ing mode is selected.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the “Audio Adjust” menu, change the “Multiplex”
setting to “Main” or “Sub” (page 107).
The u functions don’t work
• To use u, you must make an u connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
tally (page 50).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the u functions
don’t work.
The functions Auto Power On/Standby and
Direct Change don’t work for components con-
nected via u
• These functions don’t work when Zone 2 is turned on.
When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,
the measurement fails showing the message
“Ambient noise is too high”.
• This can be caused by any malfunction in your speaker
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
The following settings can be made for the S-
Video and composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these set-
tings.
1. While holding down the input selector button for the
input source that you want to set, press the [SETUP]
button.
2. Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
3. Press the [SETUP] button when you’ve finished.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the DVD, VCR/DVR,
CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, or AUX input.
If you have a games console connected to the
S-Video or composite video input, and the picture
isn’t very clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Video ATT:OFF: (default).
Video ATT:ON: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
Others
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
For North American model, set the AV receiver to
Standby before disconnecting the power cord from the
wall outlet. For other models, set the AV receiver to
Standby and the POWER switch to OFF before discon-
necting the power cord.
147
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
*1 The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”.
*2 The output is limited to 480p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
✔: Output
NTSC
HDMI*1 COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
1080p 1080i 720p 480p 480i 1080i 720p 480p 480i 480i 480i
HDMI
1080p ✔✔✔✔
1080i ✔✔✔✔
720p ✔✔✔✔
480p ✔✔✔✔
480i ✔✔✔✔✔
COMPONENT
1080i ✔✔✔✔ ✔✔✔
720p ✔✔✔✔ ✔✔✔
480p ✔✔✔✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔
480i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔✔
S-VIDEO 480i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔✔✔ ✔
COMPOSITE 480i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ ✔ ✔✔
PAL
HDMI*1 COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
1080p 1080i 720p 576p 576i 1080i 720p 576p 576i 576i 576i
HDMI
1080p ✔✔✔✔
1080i ✔✔✔✔
720p ✔✔✔✔
576p ✔✔✔✔
576i ✔✔✔✔✔
COMPONENT
1080i ✔✔✔✔ ✔✔✔
720p ✔✔✔✔ ✔✔✔
576p ✔✔✔✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔
576i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔✔
S-VIDEO 576i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔✔✔ ✔
COMPOSITE 576i ✔✔✔✔✔
✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ ✔ ✔✔
: The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
: The video signal will be output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” and the “Resolu-
tion” setting is set to “Through”.
Output
Input
Output
Input
148
Specifications (TX-SR876)
Amplifier Section
Video Section
Tuner Section
■FM
■AM
■Digital Tuner
General
■Video Input
■Video Output
■Audio Inputs
■Audio Outputs
■Control Terminal
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
Rated Output Power
North American:
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
European:
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Asian:
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
7 ch × 250 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
Dynamic Power 320 W (3 Ω, Front)
270 W (4 Ω, Front)
160 W (8 Ω, Front)
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion) 0.05% (Power Rated)
Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance 200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Output Level and
Impedance 200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
Frequency Response 5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
Tone Control ±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance 4 Ω – 16 Ω
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance 1 Vp-p /75 Ω
(Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75 Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response 5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
Tuning Frequency Range
North American: 87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
European and Asian: 87.50 MHz– 108.00 MHz, RDS
Tuning Frequency Range
North American: 530 kHz–1710 kHz
European: 522 kHz–1611 kHz
Others: 522/530 kHz–1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel 40
North American: XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
Power Supply
North American: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
European: AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Asian: AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
North American: 9.6 A
European and Asian: 870 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8"
×
7-5/8"
×
18-1/16"
Weight
North American: 24.1 kg
53.1 lbs.
European and Asian: 23.3 kg
51.4 lbs.
HDMI IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
Component IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
S-Video DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
Composite DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2
HDMI OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
Component MONITOR OUT
S-Video VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
Composite VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE 2 OUT
Digital Inputs OPTICAL: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
COAXIAL: 3 (Rear)
Analog Inputs MULTI CH (FRONT, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR BACK,
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, TAPE, CD, PHONO, AUX 2
Multichannel Inputs 7.1
Digital Output OPTICAL: 1 (Rear)
Analog Outputs VCR/DVR OUT, TAPE OUT, PRE OUT
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
Multichannel Pre
Outputs 7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1
Speaker Outputs ZONE 2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE 2 L
Phones 1
MIC Yes
RS232 1
IR Input/Output 1/1
12 V Trigger Out 1
149
Specifications (TX-NR906)
Amplifier Section
Video Section
Tuner Section
■FM
■AM
■Digital Tuner
General
■Video Input
■Video Output
■Audio Inputs
■Audio Outputs
■Control Terminal
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
Rated Output Power
North American:
145 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
175 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
185 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
European:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Asian:
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
Dynamic Power 400 W (3 Ω, Front)
300 W (4 Ω, Front)
180 W (8 Ω, Front)
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion) 0.05% (Power Rated)
Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance 200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Output Level and
Impedance 200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
Frequency Response 5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
Tone Control ±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance 4 Ω – 16 Ω
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance 1 Vp-p /75 Ω
(Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75 Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response 5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
Tuning Frequency Range
North American: 87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
European and Asian: 87.50 MHz– 108.00 MHz, RDS
Tuning Frequency Range
North American: 530 kHz–1710 kHz
European: 522 kHz–1611 kHz
Others: 522/530 kHz–1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel 40
North American: XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO
Power Supply
North American: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
European: AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Asian: AC 120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
North American: 9.8 A
European and Asian: 1000 W
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
17-1/8"
×
7-5/8"
×
18-1/16"
Weight
North American: 24.5 kg
54.0 lbs.
European and Asian: 24.3 kg
53.6 lbs.
HDMI IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
Component IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
S-Video DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX1, AUX2
Composite DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX1, AUX2
HDMI OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
Component MONITOR OUT
S-Video VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
Composite VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,
ZONE 2 OUT
Digital Inputs OPTICAL: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
COAXIAL: 3 (Rear)
Analog Inputs MULTI CH (FRONT, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR BACK),
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, TAPE, CD, PHONO, AUX 2
Multichannel Inputs 7.1
Digital Output OPTICAL: 1 (Rear)
Analog Outputs VCR/DVR OUT, TAPE OUT, PRE OUT
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
Multichannel Pre
Outputs 7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1
Speaker Outputs ZONE 2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE 2 L
Phones 1
MIC Yes
Ethernet 1
RS232 1
IR Input/Output 1/1
12 V Trigger Out 1
USB Yes (1)
SN 29344753A
Y0807-2
(C) Copyright 2008 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
http://www.onkyo.com/
HOMEPAGE
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/
* 2 9 3 4 4 7 5 3 A *

Navigation menu